FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION...

165
1 SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6 SC100/200 Series MULTI-FUNCTION PID CONTROLLER FUNCTION BLOCK LIST Applicable Models SC100 SC110 SC200 SC210 SC200W SC210W http://www.m-system.co.jp/ 5-2-55, Minamitsumori, Nishinari-ku, Osaka 557-0063 JAPAN Tel: +81-6-6659-8201 Fax: +81-6-6659-8510 E-mail: [email protected]

Transcript of FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION...

Page 1: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

1SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

SC100/200 SeriesMULTI-FUNCTION PID CONTROLLER

FUNCTION BLOCK LIST

ApplicableModels

SC100SC110SC200SC210SC200WSC210W

http://www.m-system.co.jp/

5-2-55, Minamitsumori, Nishinari-ku, Osaka 557-0063 JAPANTel: +81-6-6659-8201 Fax: +81-6-6659-8510

E-mail: [email protected]

Page 2: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

2SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Contents

1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................5

2. FUNCTION BLOCKS COMMON TO ALL MODELS .............................6System Common Table (for SC100/200 series) ....................................................................... 7System Common Table (for remote I/O) .................................................................................. 9Basic PID ............................................................................................................................... 11Advanced PID ........................................................................................................................ 13Manual Loader ....................................................................................................................... 16Ratio Setter ............................................................................................................................ 17Indicator ................................................................................................................................ 19Di Receive Terminal ............................................................................................................... 20Do Send Terminal................................................................................................................... 22Ai Receive Terminal ................................................................................................................ 23Ao Send Terminal ................................................................................................................... 25Discrete Contact Input / Accumulated Value Output............................................................... 26Pulse Adder ........................................................................................................................... 27Pulse/Analog Multiplication ................................................................................................... 28Pulse Accumulator ................................................................................................................. 29Pulse Input / Discrete Contact Output .................................................................................... 30Batch Program ....................................................................................................................... 31Addition / Subtraction ............................................................................................................ 33Multiplication ......................................................................................................................... 34Division .................................................................................................................................. 35Square Root Extractor ............................................................................................................ 36Absolute Value ....................................................................................................................... 37Non-Linear Gain, Deadband ................................................................................................... 38Low-end Cutout ..................................................................................................................... 39Segment Linearizer ................................................................................................................ 40Temperature/Pressure Compensation .................................................................................... 42Rate of Change Limit ............................................................................................................. 43First Order Lag ....................................................................................................................... 44First Order Lag with Two Time Constants .............................................................................. 45Ramp Buffer ........................................................................................................................... 46Mean Average ........................................................................................................................ 47Moving Average ..................................................................................................................... 48Lead Time Computation ......................................................................................................... 50Dead Time Computation......................................................................................................... 51Dead Time Compensation ...................................................................................................... 52Accumulator (momentary value input)................................................................................... 53Ramp Program Setter ............................................................................................................ 54High/Low Limiter ................................................................................................................... 56Deviation Limiter .................................................................................................................... 57Input Selector (with ramp control at switching) ..................................................................... 58Output Selector ...................................................................................................................... 59Input Selector (2 points) ........................................................................................................ 60Input Selector (8 points) ........................................................................................................ 61Maximum Value Selector ....................................................................................................... 63Minimum Value Selector ........................................................................................................ 64Parameter Selector (2 points) ................................................................................................ 65Parameter Generator (8 points) ............................................................................................. 66High/Low Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 67

Page 3: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

3SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Deviation Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 68Rate of Change Alarm ............................................................................................................ 69Parameter Setter .................................................................................................................... 70Numeral Converter ................................................................................................................. 72Weight Totalizer ..................................................................................................................... 75Analog/Pulse Duration Converter ........................................................................................... 76Analog Signal Hold ................................................................................................................ 77ITEM Reader .......................................................................................................................... 78Contact Distributor ................................................................................................................. 79Analog Signal Comparator ..................................................................................................... 81Annunciator ........................................................................................................................... 83ON-OFF Timer ........................................................................................................................ 85Timer ..................................................................................................................................... 86Counter .................................................................................................................................. 87Internal Switch ....................................................................................................................... 88System’s Internal Switch ........................................................................................................ 89Sequential Control Program ................................................................................................... 90

3. FIELD TERMINAL BLOCKS ..................................................... 95SC100 Field Terminal ............................................................................................................. 96SC100 Extension Field Terminal 1 .......................................................................................... 98SC100 Extension Field Terminal 2 ........................................................................................ 101SC200 Field Terminal ........................................................................................................... 104SC200 Extension Field Terminal 1 ........................................................................................ 106SC200 Extension Field Terminal 2 ........................................................................................ 109SC200W Field Terminal ........................................................................................................ 112SC200W Extension Field Terminal 1..................................................................................... 114SC200W Extension Field Terminal 2..................................................................................... 117SC110 Field Terminal ........................................................................................................... 120SC110 Extension Field Terminal 1 ........................................................................................ 122SC110 Extension Field Terminal 2 ........................................................................................ 125SC210 Field Terminal ........................................................................................................... 128SC210 Extension Field Terminal 1 ........................................................................................ 130SC210 Extension Field Terminal 2 ........................................................................................ 133SC210W Field Terminal ........................................................................................................ 136SC210W Extension Field Terminal 1..................................................................................... 138SC210W Extension Field Terminal 2..................................................................................... 141SML-A4 Field Terminal ......................................................................................................... 144SML-C7, -C8 Field Terminal ................................................................................................. 145SML-E5 Field Terminal ......................................................................................................... 146SML-G3 Field Terminal......................................................................................................... 147SML-G4 Field Terminal......................................................................................................... 149SML-M4 Field Terminal ........................................................................................................ 150SML-P4 Field Terminal ......................................................................................................... 151SML-R2 Field Terminal......................................................................................................... 153SML-R3 Field Terminal......................................................................................................... 154SML-S5 Field Terminal ......................................................................................................... 156SML-S6 Field Terminal ......................................................................................................... 157

Page 4: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

4SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4. EXPLANATIONS ................................................................1594.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................159

4.2 RELATION BETWEEN FUNCTION BLOCKS ........................................................159

4.3 FUNCTION BLOCK ALLOCATIONS .................................................................160

4.4 CONNECTING BETWEEN FUNCTION BLOCKS ....................................................161

4.4.1 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TERMINALS REPRESENTATION IN A FUNCTION BLOCK 161

4.4.2 CONNECTING ANALOG SIGNALS .........................................................161

4.4.3 CONNECTING DISCRETE SIGNALS .......................................................161

4.4.4 PARAMETER SETTER ......................................................................161

4.4.5 ITEM READER ...............................................................................162

4.5 SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION BY COMMUNICATION TERMINALS .........................163

Appendix 1. FUNCTION BLOCK ERROR CODES .........................................................164

Appendix 2. SC SERIES VERSION UPGRADE INFORMATION .........................................165

Page 5: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

5SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

1. INTRODUCTION■ Symbols used in function block tables ◆ : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter Setter block. Refer to General Description of the Parameter Setter block (Model 79). ★ : Setting data Parameter is required or can be set in order to use the relevant function block. ITEMS without ◆ or ★ : ITEM is used to monitor operating status or values. ● : Parameter is always modifiable. ▲ : Parameter is modifiable when ITEM 01 (maintenance switch) is set to PROGRAM mode. ❄ : Parameter is modifiable when ITEM 01 (maintenance switch) is set to SIMULATION mode.

■ Function block limitation depending upon ROM versionCertain function blocks or functions (ITEM) may not be available depending upon ROM version of the controller. ROM version can be verified at GROUP 00, ITEM 99.ROM version limitations are identified with symbols such as SC 1.50 . Refer to Appendix 2. SC SERIES VERSION UPGRADE INFORMATION for supplementary information.

Unavailable Functions • Rate-of-Change Limit (Model 17)

Limited Functions • Basic PID (Model 21) • Advanced PID (Model 22) • Segment Linearizer (Model 58) • Moving Average (Model 64) • SCxxx Extension Field Terminal 1 (Model F72, F73, Group 04) • SCxxx Extension Field Terminal 2 (Model F70, F71, F72, F73, Group 05)

Page 6: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

6SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NAME [GROUP]SYSTEM COMMON TABLE For SC100/200 Series [G00] For Remote I/O [G00]CONTROLBCA 21 Basic PID [G02...03]ECA 22 Advanced PID [G02...03]MVA 23 Manual Loader [G02...03]RSA 24 Ratio Setter [G02...03]IND 25 Indicator [G02...03]COMMUNICATION TERMINALSCDI 31 Di Receive Terminal [G11...26]CDO 32 Do Send Terminal [G11...26]CAI 33 Ai Receive Terminal [G11...26]CAO 34 Ao Send Terminal [G11...26]OPERATIONS PULSE INPUTQIP 44 Discrete Contact Input/Accumulated Value Output [G30...61]PAD 45 Pulse Adder [G30...61]QAM 46 Pulse/Analog Multiplication [G30...61]QSS 47 Pulse Accumulator [G30...61]QPO 48 Pulse Input/Discrete Contact Output [G30...61]BPS 49 Batch Program [G62...69] ARITHMETICADS 51 Addition/Subtraction [G30...61]MLT 52 Multiplication [G30...61]DVD 53 Division [G30...61] FUNCTIONSSQR 54 Square Root Extractor [G30...61]ABS 55 Absolute Value [G30...61]NLN 56 Non-linear Gain, Deadband [G30...61]DRP 57 Low-end Cutout [G30...61]LIN 58 Segment Linearizer [G72...79]TCP 59 Temperature/Pressure Compensation [G30...61] TIME FUNCTIONSRCL 17 Rate of Change Limit [G30...61]LAG 60 First Order Lag [G30...61]2LG 61 First Order Lag with two time constants [G30...61]RMP 62 Ramp Buffer [G30...61]MAJ 63 Mean Average [G30...61]RAV 64 Moving Average [G30...61]LED 65 Lead Time Computation [G30...61]DTM 66 Dead Time Computation [G30...61]DTC 67 Dead Time Compensation [G30...61]

2. FUNCTION BLOCKS COMMON TO ALL MODELS

MODEL NAME [GROUP] OPERATIONS (continued)QNT 68 Accumulator [G30...61]PRG 69 Ramp Program Setter [G72...79] (58 Ramp Program by Segment Linearizer) SIGNAL LIMITERSHLL 70 High/Low Limiter [G30...61]DVL 71 Deviation Limiter [G30...61] SIGNAL SELECTORSSFT 18 Input Selector [G30...61] (with ramp control at switching)OTS 19 Output Selector [G30...61] INS 72 Input Selector (2 points) [G30...61]INE 85 Input Selector (8 points) [G30...61]MAX 73 Maximum Value Selector [G30...61]MIN 74 Minimum Value Selector [G30...61]CTS 75 Parameter Selector (2 points) [G30...61]CTE 86 Parameter Generator (8 points) [G30...61] ALARMPVA 76 High/Low Alarm [G30...61]DVA 77 Deviation Alarm [G30...61]VRA 78 Rate of Change Alarm [G30...61] (rate of change function) OTHERSPMS 79 Parameter Setter [G30...61]BCD 80 Numeral Converter [G30...61]QWT 81 Weight Totalizer (load cell input) [G30...61]ADT 82 Analog/Pulse Duration Converter [G30...61]AMM 83 Analog Signal Hold [G30...61] (max. value, momentary value or min. value)ITR 84 ITEM Reader [G30...61]SEQUENTIAL CONTROLDCN 87 Contact Distributor [G30...61]ACP 88 Analog Comparator [G30...61]ANN 89 Annunciator [G30...61]TMC 90 ON-OFF Timer [G30...61]TMR 91 Timer [G30...61]CTR 92 Counter [G30...61]ISW 93 Internal Switch [G30...61]SSW 94 System’s Internal Switch [G80]SEQ 95 Sequential Control Program [G81...92]

Page 7: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

7SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

BLOCK NAME

System Common Table (for SC100/200 series)

GROUP [00] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 00 ● 0, 1 CD: N Module switch (0: actual, 1: expansion) (Remark 1) 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command)

Switching Group 00 maintenance switch affects all other groups. 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND ■ CONTROL STATUS INDICATION RUN Running STOP Stopped 03 ▲ ■ OPERATION COMMAND 0 STOP Stop 1 HOT START Hot start 2 COLD START Cold start 06 IND ■ Nest Bus TRANSMISSION STATUS INDICATION RUN Transmitting STOP Stopped ★ 08 ▲ ■ Nest Bus TRANSMISSION MODE 0 0 Send/Receive mode C#: 00 to 0F 1 1 Receive only mode C#: 10 to 1E

(C# upper digit is automatically set to ‘1’. Data from upper bus cannot be received.)

★ 11 ▲ 50 to 3000 NNNN ■ COMPUTATION CYCLE (msec) (100 to 3000 for SC200W, SC210W) Selectable in every 10 milliseconds 12 IND NNN% ■ CONTROL LOAD RATE INDICATION (%) 13 ● 0 NNN% ■ MAX. CONTROL LOAD RATE INDICATION (%) Reset when “0” is entered. ■ SYSTEM STATUS INDICATION (error indication) 21 IND • EEPROM Data Base Failed ALLRIGHT All blocks proved normal GROUP NN Abnormal block No. indication (NN: GROUP No.) 22 IND • PV Abnormality (Pv 1 OR Pv 2)

PV input H/L alarm status in the field terminal block indicated PV NORMAL PV proved normal PV ABNORMAL PV proved abnormal 23 IND • MV Feedback Abnormality (Mv 1 OR Mv 2) deviation alarm status of MV check input and MV output in the field terminal block indicated MV NORMAL MV feedback proved normal MV ABNORMAL MV feedback proved abnormal 24 IND • Block Abnormality (GROUP No. indicated) ALLRIGHT All blocks proved normal GROUP NN Abnormal block No. indication (NN: GROUP No.) 25 IND • Control Overload LOAD: RIGHT Appropriate control load LOAD: OVER Control overload 26 IND • Supervisory communication error COM: NN Number of communication error events (NN)

Page 8: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

8SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 30 IND • Supervisory communication error COM: PER: NN Number of parity error events (NN) 31 IND • Supervisory communication error COM: FER: NN Number of framing error events (NN) 32 IND • Supervisory communication error COM: OER: NN Number of overrun error events (NN) 33 IND • Supervisory communication error COM: SER: NN Number of sum check error events (NN) 35 IND • Abnormal FB No. hold ALLRIGHT All blocks proved normal GROUP NN Abnormal block No. indication (NN: GROUP No.) 36 IND • Abnormality contents hold ER: NN Abnormal block contents (NN) 40 ● ■ COMPUTATION CYCLE SWITCHING FLAG 0, 1 0 Normal 1 Computation cycle switched Reset when “0” is entered. Once reset, “LOAD: RIGHT” is set in ITEM 25. ★ 51 ▲ 0 – F CD : 0 ■ CARD NO. REGISTRATION (Remark 2) 60 ▲ ■ RUN CONTACT ERROR RESET MODE (Remark 3) 0, 1 RUN: 0 Automatic reset RUN: 1 Manual reset 61 ● ■ RUN CONTACT ERROR RESET FLAG (Remark 3) 0, 1 0 Normal 1 Reset (valid when ITEM 60 is set to ‘manual reset’) 95 ▲ 1 BLOCK RELEASE ■ DELETE MODEL NO. COMMAND (Remark 4) (initial display *) Group 00, 01, 04, 05 or 80 are not deleted. ★ 96 IND 00 – 99 FIELD: 73 ■ FIELD TERMINAL MODEL IDENTIFICATION ★ 97 ▲ SC210 ■ HARDWARE MODEL NO. INDICATION

(max. 8 characters, for use in the supervisory system) 99 IND DCSSC N.NN ■ ROM VERSION INDICATION

Remark 1: Only available with SC200W and SC210WRemark 2: The controller is automatically reset when the card No. is changed.Remark 3: ROM Version 1.50 or laterRemark 4: In case of SC200W and SC210W, the module specified at ITEM 00 ‘Module switch’ is deleted.

Page 9: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

9SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

BLOCK NAME

System Common Table (for remote I/O)

GROUP [00] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command)

Switching Group 00 maintenance switch affects all other groups. 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND ■ CONTROL STATUS INDICATION RUN Running STOP Stopped 03 ▲ ■ OPERATION COMMAND 0 STOP Stop 1 HOT START Hot start 2 COLD START Cold start 06 IND ■ Nest Bus TRANSMISSION STATUS INDICATION RUN Transmitting STOP Stopped ★ 08 ▲ ■ Nest Bus TRANSMISSION MODE 0 0 Send/Receive mode C#: 00 to 0F 1 1 Receive only mode C#: 10 to 1E

(C# upper digit is automatically set to ‘1’. Data from upper bus cannot be received.)

★ 11 ▲ ■ COMPUTATION CYCLE 0 1 Sec 1 second 1 0.5 Sec 0.5 second 2 0.25 Sec 0.25 second 3 0.12 Sec 0.12 second 12 IND NNN% ■ CONTROL LOAD RATE INDICATION (%) 13 ● 0 NNN% ■ MAX. CONTROL LOAD RATE INDICATION (%) Reset when “0” is entered. ■ SYSTEM STATUS INDICATION (error indication) 21 IND • EEPROM Data Base Failed ALLRIGHT All blocks proved normal GROUP NN Abnormal block No. indication (NN: GROUP No.) 22 IND • PV Abnormality

(PV input H/L alarm status in the field terminal block indicated) PV NORMAL PV proved normal PV ABNORMAL PV proved abnormal 23 IND • MV Feedback Abnormality (deviation alarm status of MV check input

and MV output in the field terminal block indicated) MV NORMAL MV feedback proved normal MV ABNORMAL MV feedback proved abnormal 24 IND • Block Abnormality (GROUP No. indicated) ALLRIGHT All blocks proved normal GROUP NN Abnormal block No. indication (NN: GROUP No.) 25 IND • Control Overload LOAD: RIGHT Appropriate control load LOAD: OVER Control overload

Page 10: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

10SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 40 ● ■ COMPUTATION CYCLE SWITCHING FLAG 0, 1 0 Normal 1 Computation cycle switched Reset when “0” is entered. Once reset, “LOAD: RIGHT” is set in ITEM 25. 95 ▲ 1 BLOCK RELEASE ■ DELETE MODEL NO. COMMAND (initial display *) Group 00, 01 or 80 are not deleted. ★ 96 IND 00 – 99 FIELD: 24 ■ FIELD TERMINAL MODEL IDENTIFICATION ★ 97 ▲ SML-A4 ■ HARDWARE MODEL NO. INDICATION

(max. 8 characters, for use in the supervisory system) 99 IND 18MF N.NN ■ ROM VERSION INDICATION

Page 11: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

11SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

21 Basic PID 21ABBR: BCA

GROUP [02, 03] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 21 MD: 21 BASIC PID (model) ‘-’ to clear. PROCESS VALUE (PV)

★ 15 ▲ GGNN P#: 0121 PV connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

16 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PV: NNN.NN PV % ◆ ★ 19 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PH: NNN.NN PV high alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 20 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PL: NNN.NN PV low alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 21 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % HS: NNN.NN Hysteresis (deadband) 22 ▲ 0, 1 01: N PV high alarm 23 ▲ 0, 1 02: N PV low alarm

01

LOCAL SPSUPV. MANIPUL. SP

PV ALARM

SWITCH

SUPV. IND. PVA

SUPV. IND. C/L

SUPV. MANIPUL. C/L

ITEM 15

PV Connection Terminal

SUPV. IND. PV

SUPV. IND. MV

SUPV. MANIPUL. MV

SUPV. IND. SP

ITEM 24

ITEM 27

0 1

ITEM 19 – 21

DEV. ALARMDEVIATIONITEM 34

ITEM 40 – 45

ITEM 50 – 51

CAS Connection Terminal

PRESET VALUE

ITEM 53

ITEM 65

23

22

Deviation Output

25 MV

PV Hi Alarm

02 PV Lo Alarm

C/L SW

DIR./REV. PID

0

HI/LO LIMIT

SWITCH1

01

SWITCHMANIPUL. MV

ITEM 60ITEM 86 DIR./REV.INDICATION *

SUPV. MV

03

Deviation Alarm05

Preset Value SW08

A/M SW11

SUPV. IND. DVA

CURRENT SP

SUPV. IND. A/M

SUPV. MANIPUL. A/M

*Direct action MV value is applied for internal processing regardless of ITEM 86 setting.

Page 12: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

12SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS SETPOINT VALUE (SP)

★ 24 ▲ GGNN C#: 0225 CAS connection terminal 25 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % SP: NNN.NN CAS %◆ ★ 27 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SP: NNN.NN Local SP % ★ 29 ▲ 0, 1 SM: N Setting mode (0: local, 1: cascade/local) ◆ 30 ● 0, 1 03: N C/L SW (0: local, 1: cascade) 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Current SP % DEVIATION

◆ ★ 34 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % DL: NNN.NN Deviation alarm setpoint (hysteresis (deadband) in ITEM 21) 35 ▲ 0, 1 05: N Deviation alarm 36 ▲ ±115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Deviation output % CONTROL

★ 40 ▲ 0, 1 DR: N Control direction (0: direct, 1: reverse [MV decreases with PV increase])

★ 41 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Derivative method (0: PV derivative, 1: deviation derivative)◆ ★ 42 ● 1 – 1000 % PB: NNNN Proportional band◆ ★ 43 ● 0.00 – 100.00 min. TI: NNN.NN Integral time (0.00: no integral action)◆ ★ 44 ● 0.00 – 10.00 min. TD: NN.NN Derivative time (0.00: no derivative action) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 CP: NN Control cycle (multiple of basic control cycle) CONTROL OUTPUT MV

◆ ★ 50 ● ±115.00 % MH: NNN.NN Output high limit◆ ★ 51 ● ±115.00 % ML: NNN.NN Output low limit 52 ▲ 0, 1 08: N Preset value SW (1: preset)◆ ★ 53 ● ±115.00 % MI: NNN.NN Preset value ◆ 59 ● 0, 1 11: N A/M SW (0: manual, 1: auto) ◆ 60 ● ±115.00 % MV: NNN.NN Supervisory indication / manipulated MV %◆ ★ 64 ● ±115.00 % RS: NNN.NN Manual reset (usable when no I action is employed) 65 ▲ ±115.00 % 25: NNN.NN MV % ★ 66 ▲ 0, 1 MS: N Smooth tracking output with local SP change (0: without, 1: with)★ 68 ▲ 0, 1 ARW: N Integral action range (0: MH – ML, 1: set range) SC 1.50

★ 69 ▲ ±115.00 % ARH: NNN.NN Integral action high limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.50

★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % ARL: NNN.NN Integral action low limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.50

★ 71 ▲ 0, 1 LOCAL SP limit range (0: PH – PL, 1: set range) SC 1.70

◆ ★ 72 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SH: NNN.NN LOCAL SP high limit (valid when ITEM 71 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.70

◆ ★ 73 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SL: NNN.NN LOCAL SP low limit (valid when ITEM 71 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.70

SUPERVISORY INDICATION USE

★ 80 ▲ alphanumeric TG: XXX ....X Tag name (10 characters max.) ★ 81 ▲ alphanumeric TC: XXXX ....X Tag comment (16 characters max.) ★ 82 ▲ ±32000 MH: 15000 Upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 83 ▲ ±32000 ML: 0 Lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 84 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DP: 1 Decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 85 ▲ alphanumeric TU: XXX ....X Engineering unit (8 characters max.) ★ 86 ▲ 0, 1 MD: N MV reverse indication (0: direct, 1: reverse)

(1: send/receive 100 – 0% proportionally to 0 – 100%.)

Page 13: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

13SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

22 Advanced PID 22ABBR: ECA

01

21FIRST ORDER LAG

LOCAL SPSUPV. MANIPUL. SP

PV ALARM

WRITE

SWITCH

RATE-OF-CHANGE LIMIT

SUPV. IND. PVA

SUPV. IND. C/L

SUPV. MANIPUL. C/L

ITEM 15 ITEM 17

PV Connection Terminal

SUPV. IND. PV

SUPV. IND. SP

FRONT IND. SP

RATIO

ITEM 24

ITEM 27

0 1

1

ITEM 26

ITEM 32

ITEM 19 – 21

DEV. ALARMDEVIATIONITEM 34

ITEM 40 – 45

ITEM 50 – 51

CAS Connection Terminal

PRESET VALUE

ITEM 39

ITEM 53

Input CompensationConnection Terminal

ITEM 49Output CompensationConnection Terminal

ITEM 56External Feedback

Connection Terminal

Current PV

22 Current SP

23 Deviation Output(for input compensation)

24 PID Output

25 MV

PV Hi Alarm

02 PV Lo Alarm

C/L SW

0

SWITCH

DIR./REV. PID

0

0

SWITCH

HI/LO LIMIT

SWITCH

ITEM 54

0

RATE-OF-CHANGE LIMIT

SWITCH

01

1

1

1

0

SWITCH

1

SWITCH

04

15

SP Tracking SW

I Operation Cancel SW

14PV Hi/Lo/Dev. Alarm Cancel SW 03

Deviation Alarm05

Input Compensation SW06

MV Hi Limit Reached

MV Lo Limit Reached

12

13

Output Compensation SW07

Preset Value SW08

Output Hold SW09

External Feedback SW10

A/M SW11

SUPV. IND. DVA

SUPV. IND. A/M

SUPV. MANIPUL. A/MSUPV. IND. MV

SUPV. MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 65

MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 60ITEM 86 DIR./REV.INDICATION *

SUPV. MV

*Direct action MV value is applied for internal processing regardless of ITEM 86 setting.

Page 14: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

14SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [02, 03] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 22 MD: 22 ADVANCED PID (model) ‘-’ to clear. PROCESS VALUE (PV)

★ 15 ▲ GGNN P#: 0121 PV connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

16 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PV: NNN.NN PV % ◆ ★ 17 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s PT: NNN.N PV first order lag time constant (0.0: without) 18 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Current PV %◆ ★ 19 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PH: NNN.NN PV high alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 20 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PL: NNN.NN PV low alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 21 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % HS: NNN.NN Hysteresis (deadband) 22 ▲ 0, 1 01: N PV high alarm 23 ▲ 0, 1 02: N PV low alarmSETPOINT VALUE (SP)

★ 24 ▲ GGNN C#: 0225 CAS connection terminal 25 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % SP: NNN.NN CAS % ◆ ★ 26 ● ±32.000 RT: NN.NNN Ratio setting (signal % ratio) ◆ ★ 27 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SP: NNN.NN Local SP % ★ 29 ▲ 0, 1 SM: N Setting mode (0: local, 1: cascade/local) ◆ 30 ▲ 0, 1 03: N C/L SW (0: local, 1: cascade) 31 ● 0, 1 04: N SP tracking SW (0: OFF, 1: ON) ★ 32 ● 0.00 – 115.00 %/s SR: NNN.NN SP rate-of-change limit (0.00: without) 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Current SP %DEVIATION

◆ ★ 34 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % DL: NNN.NN Deviation alarm setpoint (hysteresis (deadband) in ITEM 21) 35 ▲ 0, 1 05: N Deviation alarm 36 ▲ ±115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Deviation output % ★ 37 ▲ 0, 1 06: N Input compensation SW (0: without, 1: with) ★ 38 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 IM: N Input compensation method

(0: without, 1: addition, 2: subtraction, 3: substitution) ★ 39 ▲ GGNN I#: 0221 Input compensation connection terminal CONTROL

★ 40 ▲ 0, 1 DR: N Control direction (0: direct, 1: reverse [MV decreases with PV increase]) ★ 41 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Derivative method (0: PV derivative, 1: deviation derivative) ◆ ★ 42 ● 1 – 1000 % PB: NNNN Proportional band ◆ ★ 43 ● 0.00 – 100.00 min. TI: NNN.NN Integral time (0.00: no integral action) ◆ ★ 44 ● 0.00 – 10.00 min. TD: NN.NN Derivative time (0.00: no derivative action) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 CP: NN Control cycle (multiple of basic control cycle)

Page 15: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

15SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTSCONTROL OUTPUT (MV)

46 ▲ ±115.00 % 24: NNN.NN PID output % ★ 47 ▲ 0, 1 07: N Output compensation SW (0: without, 1: with) ★ 48 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 OM: N Output compensation method

(0: without, 1: addition, 2: subtraction, 3: substitution) ★ 49 ▲ GGNN O#: 0221 Output compensation connection terminal◆ ★ 50 ● ±115.00 % MH: NNN.NN Output high limit ◆ ★ 51 ● ±115.00 % ML: NNN.NN Output low limit 52 ▲ 0, 1 08: N Preset value SW (1: preset)◆ ★ 53 ● ±115.00% MI: NNN.NN Preset value ◆ ★ 54 ● 0.00 – 115.00 %/s MR: NNN.NN Output rate-of-change limit (0.00: without) 55 ▲ 0, 1 09: N Output hold SW (0: without, 1: hold) ★ 56 ▲ GGNN M#: 0221 External feedback connection terminal 57 ▲ ±115.00 % FV: NNN.NN External feedback % 58 ▲ 0, 1 10: N External feedback SW (0: without, 1: with) ◆ 59 ● 0, 1 11: N A/M SW (0: manual, 1: auto) ◆ 60 ● ±115.00 % MV: NNN.NN Supervisory indication / manipulated MV % 61 ▲ 0, 1 12: N MV high limit reached (Remark 1) 62 ▲ 0, 1 13: N MV low limit reached (Remark 1) 63 ▲ 0, 1 14: N PV alarm, deviation alarm function stop command (Remark 2) ◆ ★ 64 ● ±115.00 % RS: NNN.NN Manual reset (usable when no I action is used.) 65 ▲ ±115.00 % 25: NNN.NN MV % ★ 66 ▲ 0, 1 MS: N Smooth tracking output with local SP change (0: without, 1: with) 67 ▲ 0, 1 15: N Cancel I action SW (0: with I action, 1: cancel)★ 68 ▲ 0, 1 ARW: N Integral action range (0: MH – ML, 1: set range) SC 1.50

★ 69 ▲ ±115.00 % ARH: NNN.NN Integral action high limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.50

★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % ARL: NNN.NN Integral action low limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.50

★ 71 ▲ 0, 1 LOCAL SP limit range (0: PH – PL, 1: set range) SC 1.70

◆ ★ 72 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SH: NNN.NN LOCAL SP high limit (valid when ITEM 71 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.70

◆ ★ 73 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % SL: NNN.NN LOCAL SP low limit (valid when ITEM 71 is set to ‘1’) SC 1.70

SUPERVISORY INDICATION USE

★ 80 ▲ alphanumeric TG: XXX ....X Tag name (10 characters max.) ★ 81 ▲ alphanumeric TC: XXXX ....X Tag comment (16 characters max.) ★ 82 ▲ ±32000 MH: 15000 Upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 83 ▲ ±32000 ML: 0 Lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 84 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DP: 1 Decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 85 ▲ alphanumeric TU: XXX ....X Engineering unit (8 characters max.) ★ 86 ▲ 0, 1 MD: N MV reverse indication (0: direct, 1: reverse)

(1: send/receive 100 – 0% proportionally to 0 – 100%.)Remark 1: While the PID control loop is closed, it is turned to ‘0’. When the MV reaches the output limit, the relevant output turns to ‘1’. When the PID control is not activated (e.g. in manual control mode), both high and low limits turn to ‘1’.Remark 2: With this switch set to ‘1’, PV high/low alarm and deviation alarm functions are cancelled.

Page 16: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

16SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

23 Manual Loader 23ABBR: MVA

GROUP [02, 03] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 23 MD: 23 MANUAL LOADER (model) ‘-’ to clear.OUTPUT

◆ 60 ● ±115.00 % MV: NNN.NN Supervisory indication / manipulated MV % 65 ▲ ±115.00 % 25: NNN.NN MV % SUPERVISORY INDICATION USE

★ 80 ▲ alphanumeric TG: XXX ....X Tag name (10 characters max.) ★ 81 ▲ alphanumeric TC: XXXX ....X Tag comment (16 characters max.) ★ 86 ▲ 0, 1 MD: N MV reverse indication (0: direct, 1: reverse)

(1: send/receive 100 – 0% proportionally to 0 – 100%.)

25 MVSUPV. IND. MV

SUPV. MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 65

MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 60ITEM 86 DIR./REV.INDICATION *

SUPV. MV

*Direct action MV value is applied for internal processing regardless of ITEM 86 setting.

Page 17: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

17SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

24 Ratio Setter 24ABBR: RSA

01

LOCAL RATIOSUPV. MANIPUL. SP

PV ALARM

SUPV. IND. PV

SUPV. IND. SP

ITEM 27

ITEM 19 – 21

ITEM 40 – 41

25 MV

PV Hi Alarm

02 PV Lo Alarm

RATIO CALCULATION

01

10

SWITCH

SWITCH

A/M SW11SUPV. IND. A/M

SUPV. MANIPUL. A/M

C/L SW03SUPV. IND. C/L

SUPV. MANIPUL. C/L

RATIO EQUATION MV = SP (PV – A1) + B1

MV : output (%)SP : ±32.000PV : reference input (%)A1 : input bias (%)B1 : output bias (%)

SUPV. IND. MV

SUPV. MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 65

MANIPUL. MV

ITEM 60ITEM 86 DIR./REV.INDICATION *

SUPV. MV

ITEM 15

PV Connection Terminal

ITEM 24

CAS Connection Terminal

SUPV. IND. PVA

*Direct action MV value is applied for internal processing regardless of ITEM 86 setting.

Note: Internal data ±32000 (±320.00%) is converted into ±32.000 to give CAS SP ratio.

Page 18: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

18SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [02, 03] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 24 MD: 24 RATIO SETTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. PROCESS VALUE (PV)

★ 15 ▲ GGNN P#: 0221 PV connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

16 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PV: NNN.NN PV % ◆ ★ 19 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PH: NNN.NN PV high alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 20 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PL: NNN.NN PV low alarm setpoint◆ ★ 21 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % HS: NNN.NN Hysteresis (deadband) 22 ▲ 0, 1 01: N PV high alarm 23 ▲ 0, 1 02: N PV low alarm OPERATION

★ 24 ▲ GGNN C#: 0221 CAS connection terminal 25 ▲ ±32.000 SP: NN.NNN CAS SP ratio ◆ ★ 27 ● ±32.000 SP: NN.NNN Local SP ratio ★ 29 ▲ 0, 1 SM: N Setting mode (0: local, 1: cascade/local) ◆ 30 ● 0, 1 03: N C/L SW (0: local, 1: cascade) 33 ● ±32.000 SP: NN.NNN Current SP ratio◆ ★ 40 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Input bias ◆ ★ 41 ▲ ±115.00 % B1: NNN.NN B1 Output bias OUTPUT

◆ 59 ● 0, 1 11: N A/M SW (0: manual, 1: auto) ◆ 60 ● ±115.00 % MV: NNN.NN Supervisory indication / manipulated MV % 65 ▲ ±115.00 % 25: NNN.NN MV %◆ ★ 72 ● ±32.000 SH: NN.NNN LOCAL SP ratio high limit SC 1.70

◆ ★ 73 ● ±32.000 SL: NN.NNN LOCAL SP ratio low limit SC 1.70

SUPERVISORY INDICATION USE

◆ 80 ▲ alphanumeric TG: XXX ....X Tag name (10 characters max.) ◆ 81 ▲ alphanumeric TC: XXXX ....X Tag comment (16 characters max.) ◆ 82 ▲ ±32000 MH: 15000 Upper range (in engineering unit) ◆ 83 ▲ ±32000 ML: 0 Lower range (in engineering unit) ◆ 84 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DP: 1 Decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ◆ 85 ▲ alphanumeric TU: XXX ....X Engineering unit (8 characters max.) ◆ 86 ▲ 0, 1 MD: N MV reverse indication (0: direct, 1: reverse)

(1: send/receive 100 – 0% proportionally to 0 – 100%.)

Page 19: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

19SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

25 Indicator 25ABBR: IND

GROUP [02, 03] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 25 MD: 25 INDICATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. PROCESS VALUE (PV)

★ 15 ▲ GGNN P#: 0221 PV connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

16 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PV: NNN.NN PV % ◆ ★ 19 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PH: NNN.NN PV high alarm setpoint ◆ ★ 20 ● -15.00 – 115.00 % PL: NNN.NN PV low alarm setpoint◆ ★ 21 ● 0.00 – 115.00 % HS: NNN.NN Hysteresis (deadband) 22 ▲ 0, 1 01: N PV high alarm 23 ▲ 0, 1 02: N PV low alarm SUPERVISORY INDICATION USE

★ 80 ▲ alphanumeric TG: XXX ....X Tag name (10 characters max.) ★ 81 ▲ alphanumeric TC: XXXX ....X Tag comment (16 characters max.) ★ 82 ▲ ±32000 MH: 15000 Upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 83 ▲ ±32000 ML: 0 Lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 84 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DP: 1 Decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 85 ▲ alphanumeric TU: XXX ....X Engineering unit (8 characters max.)

01PV ALARM

ITEM 15

PV Connection Terminal

SUPV. IND. PV

ITEM 19 – 21

PV Hi Alarm

02 PV Lo Alarm

SUPV. IND. PVA

Page 20: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

20SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

31 Di Receive Terminal 31ABBR: CDI

General Description Used to receive discrete contact signals from other control cards, remote I/O devices and/or PC.• Received contact state can be re-transmitted to the network.• Signals can be remotely controlled with ON-OFF command from Sequential Control block when ITEM 11 is set to ‘FE’ (Sender

is a PC).

GROUP [11 – 26] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 31 MD: 31 Di RECEIVE TERMINAL (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ 00 – 3F S#: 1A 00 – 3F: sender station No. FE FE: PC as sender FF FF: sender within the same Nest Bus ★ 12 ▲ 0 – F C#: 1 Sender card No. ★ 13 ▲ 11 – 26 G#: 11 Sender group No. ★ 18 ▲ 0.1 – 60.0 s T: 1.0 Communication stop check time (no check when input from a PC) ★ 19 ▲ 0, 1 RT: N Re-transmission (0: without, 1: with) 21 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 01: N Di 1 discrete input signal 22 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 02: N Di 2 discrete input signal : : : : : 30 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 10: N Di 10 discrete input signal 31 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 11: N Di 11 discrete input signal : : : : : 40 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 20: N Di 20 discrete input signal 41 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 21: N Di 21 discrete input signal : : : : : 50 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 30: N Di 30 discrete input signal 51 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 31: N Di 31 discrete input signal 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 32: N Di 32 discrete input signal 53 ▲ 0, 1 TS: N Communication stop status indication (1: stop)

Remark: Be sure to perform a cold start on the device when the settings have been changed.

01

ITEM 11 – 13

ITEM 18

From another controller or module

Re-transmissionavailable

Di 1 Discrete Input Signal

Di 2 Discrete Input Signal

COMM. STOPDETECT. TIMER

02

32 Di 32 Discrete Input Signal

Communication Stop Status Output (TS)33

Page 21: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

21SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Di Receive Terminal Do Send Terminal

SenderNest Bus

■ Input from Do Send Terminal within the Same Nest Bus

[Setting]ITEM 11: FF (Sender is within the same Nest Bus)ITEM 12: 0 – F (Sender card No.)ITEM 13: 11 – 26 (Sender group No.)

■ Input from Do Send Terminal on Remote Nest Bus

[Setting]ITEM 11: 00 – 3F (Sender station No.)ITEM 12: 0 – F (Sender card No.)ITEM 13: 11 – 26 (Sender group No.)

■ Input from PC

Specify ITEM 19 to ‘1’ (re-transmission). The PC requires the setting to confirm feedback.[Setting]ITEM 11: FE (Sender is a PC)ITEM 12: any No. (disregarded)ITEM 13: any No. (disregarded)ITEM 18: any value (disregarded)ITEM 19: 1 (re-transmission)

Di Receive Terminal Communication Card

SenderNest Bus

Communication Card Do Send TerminalNest Bus

Supervisory Bus

Di Receive Terminal PC

SenderNest Bus / Supervisory Bus

Page 22: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

22SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

32 Do Send Terminal 32ABBR: CDO

General Description Used to send discrete contact signals to other control cards, remote I/O devices and/or PC.• Sender address is automatically attached when transmitting.

GROUP [11 – 26] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 32 MD: 32 Do SEND TERMINAL (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ 0, 1, 2 TR: 0 Transmission range 0: within the same Nest Bus

1: also to supervisory network 2: no transmission ★ 12 ▲ Receiver address (for DLA2 use) 0 RM: 0 Not specified 1 RM: 1 Specified (ITEM 13 – 17) ★ 13 ▲ 00 – 3F S#: 10 Receiver station No. ★ 14 ▲ 0 – F C#: 1 Receiver card No. ★ 15 ▲ 11 – 26 G#: 11 Receiver group No. ★ 16 ▲ 01 – 32 SN: 01 Top output point No. of the receiver ★ 17 ▲ 01 – 32 N: 32 Total number of points to be sent

(counted from the top point No.) 21 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 discrete output signal status indication 22 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 discrete output signal status indication : : : : : 30 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 10: N Do 10 discrete output signal status indication 31 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 11: N Do 11 discrete output signal status indication : : : : : 40 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 20: N Do 20 discrete output signal status indication 41 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 21: N Do 21 discrete output signal status indication : : : : : 50 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 30: N Do 30 discrete output signal status indication 51 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 31: N Do 31 discrete output signal status indication 52 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 32: N Do 32 discrete output signal status indication

■ Sender AddressSender address is automatically set. ITEM 10 (model), ITEM 11 (transmission range) and ITEM 12: ‘0’ are the minimum required settings.

01

To other controllers or modules

Do 1 Discrete Output Signal

Do 2 Discrete Output Signal02

32 Do 32 Discrete Output Signal

Sending 2 types of address: • Sender address • Receiver address (for DLA2)

Page 23: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

23SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

33 Ai Receive Terminal 33ABBR: CAI

General Description Used to receive analog or accumulated pulse signals from other control cards, remote I/O devices and/or PC.• Received contact status can be re-transmitted to the network.• Re-transmitted data can be received by an Ai Receive Terminal on other card No.

GROUP [11 – 26] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 33 MD: 33 Ai RECEIVE TERMINAL (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ 00 – 3F S#: 1A 00 – 3F: sender station No. FE FE: PC as sender FF FF: sender within the same Nest Bus ★ 12 ▲ 0 – F C#: 1 Sender card No. ★ 13 ▲ 11 – 26 G#: 11 Sender group No. ★ 18 ▲ 0.1 – 60.0 s T: 1.0 Communication stop check time (no check when input from a PC) ★ 19 ▲ 0, 1 RT: N Re-transmission (0: without, 1: with) 21 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 analog input signal 22 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Ai 2 analog input signal 23 ▲ 0, 1 TS: N Communication stop status indication (1: stop)

Remark: Be sure to perform a cold start on the device when the settings have been changed.

ITEM 11 – 13

ITEM 18

From another controller or module

Re-transmissionavailable

Ai 1 Analog Input Signal

Ai 2 Analog Input Signal

COMM. STOPDETECT. TIMER Communication Stop Status Output (TS)01

21

22

Page 24: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

24SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Ai Receive Terminal Ao Send Terminal

SenderNest Bus

■ Input from Ao Send Terminal within the Same Nest Bus

[Setting]ITEM 11: FF (Sender is within the same Nest Bus)ITEM 12: 0 – F (Sender card No.)ITEM 13: 11 – 26 (Sender group No.)

■ Input from Ao Send Terminal on Remote Nest Bus

[Setting]ITEM 11: 00 – 3F (Sender station No.)ITEM 12: 0 – F (Sender card No.)ITEM 13: 11 – 26 (Sender group No.)

■ Input from PC: Same as explained for Di Receive Terminal

Ai Receive Terminal Communication Card

SenderNest Bus

Communication Card Ao Send TerminalNest Bus

Supervisory Bus

Page 25: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

25SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

34 Ao Send Terminal 34ABBR: CAO

General Description Used to send analog or accumulated pulse signals to other control cards, remote I/O devices and PC.• Sender address is automatically attached.

GROUP [11 – 26] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 34 MD: 34 Ao SEND TERMINAL (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ 0, 1, 2 TR: 0 Transmission range 0: within the same Nest Bus

1: also to supervisory network 2: no transmission ★ 12 ▲ Receiver address (for DLA2 use) 0 RM: 0 Not specified 1 RM: 1 Specified (ITEM 13 – 15) ★ 13 ▲ 00 – 3F S#: 10 Station No. of the receiver ★ 14 ▲ 0 – F C#: 1 Card No. of the receiver ★ 15 ▲ 11 – 26 G#: 11 Group No. of the receiver ★ 18 ▲ GGNN 1#: 3421 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2#: 4621 Ao 2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) 21 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % A1: NNN.NN Ao 1 analog output signal 22 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % A2: NNN.NN Ao 2 analog output signal

■ Sender AddressSender address is automatically set when transmitting. ITEM 10 (model), ITEM 11 (transmission range) and ITEM 12: ‘0’ are the minimum required settings.

To other controllers or modules

Sending 2 types of address: • Sender address • Receiver address (for DLA2)

Ao 1 Re-transmitted Output

Ao 1 Analog Output Signal

Ao 2 Analog Output Signal

Ao 2 Re-transmitted Output

21

22

Page 26: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

26SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

44 Discrete Contact Input / Accumulated Value Output 44ABBR: QIP

General Description Used to count number of rising edge of discrete contact input and converts into accumulated value. Contact input is supplied through Sequential Control Program block.

Application Using discrete contact input signals in place of pulse train input signals to count.Maximum pulse rate must be at least twice as greater as the control cycle (GROUP 00, ITEM 11).

COMPUTATION CYCLE(GROUP 00, ITEM 11)

MAXIMUM PULSE RATE

0.25 sec 2 pulses/sec (7200 pulses/h)0.5 sec 1 pulse/sec (3600 pulses/h)1.0 sec 0.5 pulses/sec (1800 pulses/h)

OperationCounting from 0 up to 9999 is repeated and accumulated value is output.Internal counter is reset when Reset SW S2 is turned to ‘1’.S2 is set to ‘1’ at default setting.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0 – 9999 MC: NNNN Q0 Accumulated value 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Discrete input 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Reset SW input (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 44 MD: 44 DISCRETE CONTACT INPUT / ACCUMULATED VALUE OUTPUT (model)

‘-’ to clear.

21Accumulated Value Output

Q0ACCUMULATOR

02

S2 (Reset SW)

01Contact Input

S1

Page 27: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

27SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

45 Pulse Adder 45ABBR: PAD

General Description Used to add accumulated pulse inputs through 4 channels.Each input can be scaled from 10 down to 0.001 times to adjust weight difference.Internal counter is reset when Reset SW S1 is turned to ‘1’.S1 is set to ‘1’ at default setting.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Momentary value output 04 ▲ 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Q0 Accumulated value output 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 45 MD: 45 PULSE ADDER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 Q1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 Q2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1421 Q3 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 14 ▲ GGNN 4#: 1521 Q4 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 15 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Q1 power-law scaling ★ 16 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Q2 power-law scaling ★ 17 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Q3 power-law scaling ★ 18 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Q4 power-law scaling

(10X X = 1: x10, 0: x1, -1: x0.1, -2: x0.01, -3:x0.001) ★ 19 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 VC: 1000.00 Momentary value conversion factor or scaling rate

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 20 ▲ 1 – 16 VR: 1 Sample number for moving average in momentary value conversion

22Accumulated Value Output

Q0

21Momentary Value Output

X0

ADDER

01Reset SWS1

ITEM 12 ITEM 16POWER-LAW

SCALING

ITEM 17POWER-LAW

SCALING

ITEM 18POWER-LAW

SCALING

Q2

ITEM 11 ITEM 15POWER-LAW

SCALING

Accumulated Value InputQ1

ITEM 13

Q3

ITEM 14

Q4

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

ITEM 19 – 20

Page 28: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

28SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

46 Pulse/Analog Multiplication 46ABBR: QAM

General DescriptionUsed to multiply accumulated pulse input by analog input.Internal counter is reset when Reset SW S1 is turned to ‘1’.S1 is set to ‘1’ at default setting.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Momentary value output 04 ▲ 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Q0 Accumulated value output 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 46 MD: 46 PULSE/ANALOG MULTIPLICATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 Q1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 13 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 PD: -1 Q1 power-law scaling

(10X X = 1: x10, 0: x1, -1: x0.1, -2: x0.01, -3:x0.001) ★ 14 ▲ 0.000 – 32.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain ★ 15 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Bias ★ 16 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 VC: 1000.00 Momentary value conversion factor or scaling rate

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 17 ▲ 1 – 16 VR: 1 Sample number for moving average in momentary value conversion

22Accumulated Value Output

Q0

21Momentary Value Output

X0

Q0 = K1 (X1 – A1) Q1

01Reset SWS1

ITEM 12 ITEM 14 – 15

X1

ITEM 11 ITEM 13POWER-LAW

SCALING

Accumulated Value Input

Analog Input

Q1

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

ITEM 16 – 17

Page 29: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

29SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

47 Pulse Accumulator 47ABBR: QSS

General Description Preset counter for accumulated value input with single stage.• No accumulation while Interrupt SW S2 is set to ‘1’.• When Reset SW S1 is set to ‘1’, counter value returns to zero, and ‘Preset Value Reached’ Output Y1 is turned to ‘0.’• Accumulated Value Output Q0 returns to 0 count at 10000 counts. Fractions are then added.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Momentary value output 04 ▲ 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Q0 Accumulated value output (When Q0 is connected to analog input terminal of other function block,

9999 count becomes 99.99) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 06 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Interrupt SW (1: interrupt) 07 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Preset value reached output ★ 10 ▲ 47 MD: 47 PULSE ACCUMULATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 Q1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0 – 9999 PS: NNNN PS Preset value ★ 13 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 PD: -1 Q1 power-law scaling

(10X X = 1: x10, 0: x1, -1: x0.1, -2: x0.01, -3:x0.001) ★ 14 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 VC: 1000.00 Momentary value conversion parameter or scaling rate

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 15 ▲ 1 – 16 VR: 1 Sample number for moving average in momentary value conversion

21Momentary Value Output

X0

22Accumulated Value Output

Q0

ITEM 11 ITEM 13POWER-LAW

SCALING

Accumulated Value InputQ1

ITEM 12

Accum. ValueOutput Preset Value

Reached

01

PRESET COUNTER

10000

PRESET VALUE

InterruptInterrupt SW

S2

11Preset Value Reached

Y1

02 Reset

Preset ValueReached

S2

S1Reset SWS1

Y1

0

Q0

t

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 14 – 15

ITEM 12

Page 30: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

30SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

48 Pulse Input / Discrete Contact Output 48ABBR: QPO

General DescriptionUsed to convert accumulated value input into contact pulses. Send the converted signals to Sequential Control Program block to output to a specific location.

OperationPulse count added since last computation cycle is accumulated. Contact is turned on and off until the accumulated value reaches ‘0’.With Reset SW input, the input is stored in memory until next cycle.

• Minimum pulse cycle is twice as wide as the computation cycle (GROUP 00, ITEM 11). For example, with the cycle set to 0.5 second, 1 pulse/second is the fastest cycle.

• Change ‘Power-Law Scaling’ setting so that the accumulated difference is to be cleared with the maximum pulse rate.• The internal counter is reset when Reset SW S1 is turned to ‘1’.S1 is set to ‘1’ at default setting.

RemarkThe maximum pulse count is limited to 9999.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (0: count, 1: reset) 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Accumulated pulse output ★ 10 ▲ 48 MD: 48 PULSE INPUT / DISCRETE CONTACT OUTPUT (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 0131 Q1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ 0, -1, -2, -3 PD: -2 Q1 power-law scaling (10X X = 0: x1, -1: x0.1, -2: x0.01, -3: x0.001)

Contact Output Y1 t

Control Cycle

Contact Pulse Output

Y1

DEV. ACCUM.

PULSE STRING CONV.

01

S1 (Reset SW)

11

POWER-LAWSCALING

Accumulated Value InputQ1

ITEM 11 ITEM 12

Page 31: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

31SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

49 Batch Program 49ABBR: BPS

General DescriptionTwo-stage batch programming is available. Pre-batch and main batch settings control contact and analog outputs.• The main batch and CAS settings cannot be changed after measuring operation has been started.• When Interrupt SW S2 is turned on, the discrete output is turned off and the analog output approaches 0% in a ramp rate

K2. When the SW is off, it returns to Hold Value A3 in a ramp rate K1.• The Run SW S1 must be turned off to restart.• For the pre-batch setting, set a count number to be subtracted from the main batch setting.• Accumulated value output and main batch output are reset with Run SW turned off.

ITEM 11 ITEM 22

BATCH CONTROLLER

ITEM 25

21

22

Momentary Value Output

1

SWITCH

0HOLD VALUE

SETTING

C/L SW03

01

POWER-LAWSCALING X0

Accumulated ValueQ1

Accumulated Value Output

Q0

24Main Batch Setting Output

CAS Setting Terminal

BM

23Program Output

P0

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 23 – 24

ACCUM. BATCH QTY.

ITEM 04

OVER-RUN SET VALUE

ITEM 13

PRE-BATCH SETTING

ITEM 14

FLOW RATE LIMIT SETTING

ITEM 15

InterruptInterrupt SW

CURRENT SETTING

ITEM 27

ITEM 12

S2

11Main Batch Output

Y1

12Pre-Batch Output

Y2

02 Run

Pre-Batch

Main Batch

S2

S1Run SW

S1

Y1

Y2

Initial Value A0

Slow Down A2K1

K1 K1 K2

Hold Value A3

P0

Limit A1

t

End

Reset

Page 32: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

32SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [62 – 69] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Momentary value output 04 ▲ 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Q0 Accumulated value output 05 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN P0 Program output 06 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Run SW (0: reset, 1: run) 07 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Interrupt SW (1: interrupt) 08 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Main batch output 09 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Pre-batch output ★ 10 ▲ 49 MD: 49 BATCH PROGRAM (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 Q1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0 – 9999 BM: NNNN BM Main batch setting output◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0 – 9999 BO: NNNN BO Overrun value (to be subtracted from BM)◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0 – 9999 BP: NNNN BP Pre-batch (to be subtracted from BM) ◆ ★ 15 ▲ 0 – 9999 BI: NNNN BI Flow rate limit ◆ ★ 16 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A0: NNN.NN A0 Initial value (momentary value) ◆ ★ 17 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Flow rate limit (momentary value) ◆ ★ 18 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Slow-down value (momentary value)◆ ★ 19 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Hold value (momentary value) ◆ ★ 20 ▲ 0.00 – 100.00 %/s K1: NNN.NN K1 Up-ramp rate ◆ ★ 21 ▲ 0.00 – 100.00 %/s K2: NNN.NN K2 Down-ramp rate ★ 22 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 PD: -1 Q1 power-law scaling

(10X X = 1: x10, 0: x1, -1: x0.1, -2: x0.01, -3: x0.001) ★ 23 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 XC: 1000.00 Momentary value conversion parameter or scaling rate

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 24 ▲ 1 – 16 XP: 1 Sample number for moving average in momentary value conversion ★ 25 ▲ GGNN C#: 1221 CAS connection terminal

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ 26 ▲ 0, 1 03: N C/L SW (0: local, 1: cascade) 27 IND SP: NNNN Current SP (0 – 9999, in actual engineering unit)

Page 33: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

33SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

51 Addition / Subtraction 51ABBR: ADS

General Description: Addition by 3 inputs.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ approx. ±327 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ approx. ±327 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ approx. ±327 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input 09 ▲ approx. ±327 % X3: NNN.NN X3 Input ★ 10 ▲ 51 MD: 51 ADDITION / SUBTRACTION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 2321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain ◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±10.000 K2: NN.NNN K2 Gain ◆ ★ 16 ▲ ±10.000 K3: NN.NNN K3 Gain ◆ ★ 17 ▲ ±115.00 % A0: 1.50 A0 Bias

Remark 1: Internal calculation employs 4-digit binary computation.Remark 2: The block accepts input ranging from -327.68 through +327.67% (maximum range available for 2-digit binary computation). When the input value goes above or below this range, the output remains -327.68% or +327.67% and ITEM 02 indicates ‘11’, error status.

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 12

X2 X0

ITEM 13

X3

21X0 = K1X1 + K2X2 + K3X3 + A0

Page 34: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

34SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

52 Multiplication 52ABBR: MLT

General Description: Multiplication by 2 inputs.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ approx. ±327 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ approx. ±327 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ approx. ±327 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input ★ 10 ▲ 52 MD: 52 MULTIPLICATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain ◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±10.000 K2: NN.NNN K2 Gain ◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±115.00 % A0: 1.50 A0 Bias ◆ ★ 16 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: 1.50 A1 Bias ◆ ★ 17 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: 1.50 A2 Bias

Remark 1: Internal calculation employs 4-digit binary computation.Remark 2: The block accepts input ranging from -327.68 through +327.67% (maximum range available for 2-digit binary computation). When the input value goes above or below this range, the output remains -327.68% or +327.67% and ITEM 02 indicates ‘11’, error status.

ITEM 11

X1

X0

ITEM 12

X2

21X0 = (K1X1 + A1) (K2X2 + A2) + A0

Page 35: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

35SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

53 Division 53ABBR: DVD

General Description: Division by 2 inputs.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ approx. ±327 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ approx. ±327 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ approx. ±327 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input ★ 10 ▲ 53 MD: 53 DIVISION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain ◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±10.000 K2: NN.NNN K2 Gain ◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±115.00 % A0: 1.50 A0 Bias◆ ★ 16 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: 1.50 A1 Bias ◆ ★ 17 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: 1.50 A2 Bias

Remark 1: Internal calculation employs 4-digit binary computation.Remark 2: The block accepts input ranging from -327.68 through +327.67% (maximum range available for 2-digit binary computation). When the input value goes above or below this range, the output remains -327.68% or +327.67% and ITEM 02 indicates ‘11’, error status.

ITEM 11

X1

X0

ITEM 12

X2

21K1X1 + A1X0 = + A0

K2X2 + A2

Page 36: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

36SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

54 Square Root Extractor 54ABBR: SQR

General Description In order to extract square signal for a DP flowmeter, set K1 = 1.If you need to change signal span, change K1 value.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 54 MD: 54 SQUARE ROOT EXTRACTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Input low-end cutout setting

ITEM 11

X1 X021X0 = 10 K1 X1

When X1 is smaller than low-end cut out value or negative:

X0 = K1 X1

Page 37: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

37SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

55 Absolute Value 55ABBR: ABS

General Description: Used to output the absolute value of input signal.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 55 MD: 55 ABSOLUTE VALUE (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

ITEM 11

X1 X0X1

21

X0 = X1

X0

Page 38: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

38SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

56 Non-Linear Gain, Deadband 56ABBR: NLN

General DescriptionTypical application is a non-linear PID control. The output is connected to the input compensation terminal of the PID module in substitution method.With K2 = 0, deadband computation is available.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 56 MD: 56 NON-LINEAR GAIN, DEADBAND (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±10.000 K2: NN.NNN K2 Gain ◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±10.000 K3: NN.NNN K3 Gain◆ ★ 15 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A1: 1.50 A1 Segment point

ITEM 11

X1 X0A1

K2

K3

–A1

K1

21

X0

Page 39: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

39SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

57 Low-end Cutout 57ABBR: DRP

General Description: Used to forcibly output 0% when input signal goes below a setpoint.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 57 MD: 57 LOW-END CUTOUT (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Low-end cutout setting

ITEM 11

X0

X1A1

21X1

X0

Output

Input

Page 40: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

40SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

58 Segment Linearizer 58ABBR: LIN

General DescriptionThe output is approximated with 16 segments. SC 1.40

The output is approximated with 7 segments with SC Ver 1.40 or earlier.Both input and output signals are operational from -115% through +115%. If you need more number of segments, connect two or more Linearizer modules in series. Set only necessary number of segment points and leave others blank.Remark: Output range out of segment point setting is provided in a 45-degree incline (input gain = output gain).A1 < A2 < A3 < A4 < A5 < A6 < A7 < .... < A16 < A17

GROUP [72 – 79] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 58 MD: 58 SEGMENT LINEARIZER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 21 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Input 1 ◆ ★ 22 ▲ ±115.00 % B1: NNN.NN B1 Output 1◆ ★ 23 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Input 2◆ ★ 24 ▲ ±115.00 % B2: NNN.NN B2 Output 2 ◆ ★ 25 ▲ ±115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Input 3 ◆ ★ 26 ▲ ±115.00 % B3: NNN.NN B3 Output 3 ◆ ★ 27 ▲ ±115.00 % A4: NNN.NN A4 Input 4 ◆ ★ 28 ▲ ±115.00 % B4: NNN.NN B4 Output 4◆ ★ 29 ▲ ±115.00 % A5: NNN.NN A5 Input 5◆ ★ 30 ▲ ±115.00 % B5: NNN.NN B5 Output 5 ◆ ★ 31 ▲ ±115.00 % A6: NNN.NN A6 Input 6◆ ★ 32 ▲ ±115.00 % B6: NNN.NN B6 Output 6◆ ★ 33 ▲ ±115.00 % A7: NNN.NN A7 Input 7◆ ★ 34 ▲ ±115.00 % B7: NNN.NN B7 Output 7 ◆ ★ 35 ▲ ±115.00 % A8: NNN.NN A8 Input 8◆ ★ 36 ▲ ±115.00 % B8: NNN.NN B8 Output 8

ITEM 11

X1 X0

X1

A1

A2 A3 A4B1

B2

B3

B4

21

X0

(Remark)

(Remark)

Page 41: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

41SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ◆ ★ 37 ▲ ±115.00 % A9: NNN.NN A9 Input 9 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 38 ▲ ±115.00 % B9: NNN.NN B9 Output 9 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 39 ▲ ±115.00 % A10: NNN.NN A10 Input 10 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 40 ▲ ±115.00 % B10: NNN.NN B10 Output 10 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 41 ▲ ±115.00 % A11: NNN.NN A11 Input 11 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 42 ▲ ±115.00 % B11: NNN.NN B11 Output 11 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 43 ▲ ±115.00 % A12: NNN.NN A12 Input 12 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 44 ▲ ±115.00 % B12: NNN.NN B12 Output 12 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 45 ▲ ±115.00 % A13: NNN.NN A13 Input 13 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 46 ▲ ±115.00 % B13: NNN.NN B13 Output 13 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 47 ▲ ±115.00 % A14: NNN.NN A14 Input 14 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 48 ▲ ±115.00 % B14: NNN.NN B14 Output 14 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 49 ▲ ±115.00 % A15: NNN.NN A15 Input 15 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % B15: NNN.NN B15 Output 15 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 51 ▲ ±115.00 % A16: NNN.NN A16 Input 16 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % B16: NNN.NN B16 Output 16 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 53 ▲ ±115.00 % A17: NNN.NN A17 Input 17 SC 1.40

◆ ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % B17: NNN.NN B17 Output 17 SC 1.40

■ Ramp Program Utilizing Segment LinearizerWhen the Segment Linearizer and Accumulator blocks are combined as shown in the figure below, a ramp program can be realized.If there are not enough calibration points in one Linearizer block, connect multiple Linearizer blocks in series.Interrupt SW S2 in Accumulator block stops time signal.

SETTINGTIME RATE

ACCUMULATOR SEGMENT LINEARIZER

PARAMETERA1

PARAMETERSELECTOR

Input (time)

Outp

ut

X1

X0X0

Page 42: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

42SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

59 Temperature/Pressure Compensation 59ABBR: TCP

General Description Used to execute temperature/pressure compensation for a gaseous flow. The flow signal X1 must be linearized by Square Root Extractor before input.Refer to the Function Block Application Manual to calculate gains and biases utilizing a normalization equation.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Flow input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Pressure input 09 ▲ ±115.00 % X3: NNN.NN X3 Temperature input ★ 10 ▲ 59 MD: 59 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 Flow connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 Pressure connection terminal (Remark 1) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 2321 X3 Temperature connection terminal (Remark 1)◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±10.000 K1: NN.NNN K1 Gain◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±10.000 K2: NN.NNN K2 Gain ◆ ★ 16 ▲ ±10.000 K3: NN.NNN K3 Gain ◆ ★ 17 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: 1.50 A2 Bias ◆ ★ 18 ▲ ±115.00 % A3: 1.50 A3 Bias

Remark 1: When you need only either of pressure or temperature compensation, set ‘0000’ to unused connection terminal and ‘100’ % to unused bias (A2 or A3).

ITEM 11

Flow X1

ITEM 12

Pressure X2 X0

ITEM 13

Temperature X3

21K2X2 + A2X0 = K1X1

K3X3 + A3

Page 43: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

43SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

17 Rate of Change Limit 17ABBR: RCL

General DescriptionUsed to limit input signal change within a negative ramp rate and a positive ramp rate. • When the input change rate is slower than the setting, the block outputs the same value as the input.• With the ramp rate set to “0”, X1 equals X0.• When X2 or X3 is not connected, parameters A1 or A2 is used.• For the negative ramp rate A2 or the external negative ramp rate X3, set an absolute value (positive signal). If a negative

signal is provided, X1 equals X0.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 05 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/C X2: NNN.NN X2 External positive ramp rate 06 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/C X3: NNN.NN X3 External negative ramp rate 07 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Positive ramp rate A1 / X2 SW 08 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Negative ramp rate A2 / X3 SW 09 ▲ 0, 1 S3: N S3 Reset command SW (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 17 MD: 17 RATE OF CHANGE LIMIT (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/C A1: 3.50 A1 Positive ramp rate◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/C A2: 3.50 A2 Negative ramp rate ★ 14 ▲ 0, 1 C: N C Time unit (0: sec, 1: min) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 16 ▲ GGNN 3#: 2321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

ITEM 15

X2

ITEM 16

External Positive Ramp Rate Setting

Input

External Negative Ramp Rate SettingX3

ITEM 11

X1

X0t

Positive Ramp Rate A1 (X2)

Negative Ramp Rate A2 (X3)

21

X1

Input

t

X0

Output

Example with a Step Input

01

S2 Negative Ramp Rate A2/X3 SW(A2 is used when S2 = ‘0’)

02

S1 Positive Ramp Rate A1/X2 SW(A1 is used when S1 = ‘0’)

03

S3 Reset Command SW(X1 = X0 when S3 = ‘1’)

SC 1.50

Page 44: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

44SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

60 First Order Lag 60ABBR: LAG

General Description Used to reduce unwanted pulsation in an input signal.When Reset SW S1 is “1”, the output signal equals input.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 60 MD: 60 FIRST ORDER LAG (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s T: NNN.N T Time constant (0.0: no lag)

ITEM 11

X1 X021X1 (s)X0 (s) = 1 + Ts

01

S1 (Reset SW)

Page 45: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

45SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

61 First Order Lag with Two Time Constants 61ABBR: 2LG

General DescriptionUsed to reduce unwanted pulsation in an input signal.With a large input change, the output signal tracks quickly; while with a small change, the larger filter function is selected.

PrincipleThe module compares an input sample from the last one. When the difference A1 is smaller than the reference deviation setting DV, it chooses large time constant for sufficient buffer function. When the A1 is larger than the DV, it chooses small time constant for better response time.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 61 MD: 61 FIRST ORDER LAG with Two Time Constants (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s T1: NNN.N T1 Time constant used with larger deviation (0.0: no lag) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % DV: NNN.NN DV Deviation◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s T2: NNN.N T2 Time constant used with smaller deviation (0.0: no lag)

ITEM 11

X1

X0

X0X1

21

X1 (s)X0 (s) = 1 + Ts

SWITCH

TIME CONSTANT T = T1

TIME CONSTANT T = T2

DV < A1

DV > A1

DVA1

: Setpoint of deviation between previous value and current value: Deviation between previous value and current value

Page 46: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

46SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

62 Ramp Buffer 62ABBR: RMP

General DescriptionUsed to limit input signal change within a negative ramp rate and a positive ramp rate. • When the input change rate is slower than the setting, the block outputs the same value as the input.• With the ramp rate set to “0”, X1 equals X0.• When X2 or X3 is not connected, parameters A1 or A2 is used.• For the negative ramp rate A2 or the external negative ramp rate X3, set an absolute value (positive signal). If a negative

signal is provided, X1 equals X0.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 05 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s X2: NNN.NN X2 External positive ramp rate 06 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s X3: NNN.NN X3 External negative ramp rate 07 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Positive ramp rate A1 / X2 SW 08 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Negative ramp rate A2 / X3 SW 09 ▲ 0, 1 S3: N S3 Reset command SW (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 62 MD: 62 RAMP BUFFER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s A1: 3.50 A1 Positive ramp rate◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s A2: 3.50 A2 Negative ramp rate ★ 14 ▲ GGNN 2#: 2221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 3#: 2321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

ITEM 14

X2

ITEM 15

External Positive Ramp Rate Setting

Input

External Negative Ramp Rate SettingX3

ITEM 11

X1

X0t

Positive Ramp Rate A1 (X2)

Negative Ramp Rate A2 (X3)

21

X1

Input

t

X0

Output

Example with a Step Input

01

S2 Negative Ramp Rate A2/X3 SW(A2 is used when S2 = ‘0’)

02

S1 Positive Ramp Rate A1/X2 SW(A1 is used when S1 = ‘0’)

03

S3 Reset Command SW(X1 = X0 when S3 = ‘1’)

Page 47: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

47SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

63 Mean Average 63ABBR: MAJ

General DescriptionWith N numbers of samples, the block discards U numbers of largest ones and L number of smallest ones, then outputs proportionally to the average of the rest.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output ★ 10 ▲ 63 MD: 63 MEAN AVERAGE (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.5 – 115.0 s H: 0.5 H Sampling cycle (min. 0.5 sec. increments)◆ ★ 13 ▲ 1 – 8 N: 8 N Number of samples to be calculated◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0 – 7 U: 2 U Number of largest samples to be discarded ◆ ★ 15 ▲ 0 – 7 L: 2 L Number of smallest samples to be discarded

ITEM 11

X1 X021

Page 48: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

48SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

64 Moving Average 64ABBR: RAV

General DescriptionWith N numbers of samples, the block outputs proportionally to their average. When a new sample is added, it rejects the oldest sample and recalculates.• Three sampling modes are available: (1) 0: time, (2) 1: computation cycle, and (3) 2: synchronized to external contact.• With Reset SW S1 = 1, the output is equal to the input.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 External synchronization contact signal ★ 10 ▲ 64 MD: 64 MOVING AVERAGE (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.1 – 115.0 s H: 0.5 H Sampling cycle (min. 0.1 sec. increments) SC 1.40 (Remark 1) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ 1 – 32 N: 8 N Number of samples to be calculated SC 1.40 (Remark 2) ★ 14 ▲ 0, 1, 2 SM: 2 SM Sampling mode

(0: time, 1: computation cycle, 2: synchronized to external contact) ★ 15 ▲ 0, 1 CM: 0 CM Calculation mode SC 1.40

(0: simple average, 1: true sample average)Remark 1: Range 0.5 – 115.0 sec., min. 0.5 sec. increments for versions lower than SC Ver 1.40.Remark 2: Range 1 – 16 for versions lower than SC Ver 1.40.

ITEM 11

X1 X021

01

S1 (Reset Command)

02

S2 (External Contact Synchronizing Signal)Renewing data with a pulse rise

Calculating moving average of ‘N’ numbers of data

Page 49: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

49SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Calculation Mode• Simple AverageAveraging calculation is executed always with the number of samples specified with ITEM 13 when the reset switch (S1) is turned to ‘0’.

[Example]Number of samples to be calculated: 4Input 50% when the S1 is at ‘1’Input changed to 60%, 70% and then 80% when the S1 is at ‘0’

(1) Reset SW : 1

Input 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% Output (50+50+50+50) ÷ 4 = 50%

(2) Reset SW : 0

Input 60% 60% 50% 50% 50% Output (60+50+50+50) ÷ 4 = 52.5%

(3) Next sampling cycle

Input 70% 70% 60% 50% 50% Output (70+60+50+50) ÷ 4 = 57.5%

(4) Next sampling cycle

Input 80% 80% 70% 60% 50% Output (80+70+60+50) ÷ 4 = 65%

• True Sample AverageAveraging calculation is executed always with actial number of samples when the reset switch (S1) is turned to ‘0’.The result is equal to the simple average when samples reaches the number of samples specified with ITEM 13.

[Example]Number of samples to be calculated: 4Input 50% when the S1 is at ‘1’Input changed to 60%, 70% and then 80% when the S1 is at ‘0’

(1) Reset SW : 1

Input 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% Output (50+50+50+50) ÷ 4 = 50%

(2) Reset SW : 0

Input 60% 60% --- --- --- Output (60) ÷ 1 = 60%

(3) Next sampling cycle

Input 70% 70% 60% --- --- Output (70+60) ÷ 2 = 65%

(4) Next sampling cycle

Input 80% 80% 70% 60% --- Output (80+70+60) ÷ 3 = 70%

Page 50: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

50SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

65 Lead Time Computation 65ABBR: LED

General Description This block is used to calculate lead time of control signal.With Reset SW S1 = 1, the output is equal to the input.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 65 MD: 65 LEAD TIME COMPUTATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s T: NNN.N T Time constant (0.0: no lead)

ITEM 11

X1 X021X0 (s) = (1 + Ts) X1 (s)

01

S1 (Reset Command)

Page 51: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

51SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

66 Dead Time Computation 66ABBR: DTM

General Description The output is delayed by L seconds after the input. If you add lag time constant, the module calculates first order lag after the dead time.With Reset SW S1 = 1, the output is equal to the input.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 66 MD: 66 DEAD TIME COMPUTATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s TC: NNN.N TC Time constant (0.0: no lag) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.5 – 115.0 s H: 0.5 H Sampling cycle (min. 0.5 sec. increments) ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0 – 8 N: 8 N Number of samples to be calculated (0: dead time = 0)

ITEM 11

X1 X021e –Ls

X0 (s) = X1 (s) 1 + Ts

L = H N (dead time)01

S1 (Reset Command)

Page 52: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

52SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

67 Dead Time Compensation 67ABBR: DTC

General Description Used for Smith’s dead time compensation. Typical application is for a process in which long dead time exists constantly.Refer to ‘Function Block Application Manual’ for the use of the block.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 67 MD: 67 DEAD TIME COMPENSATION (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0.0 – 100.0 s TC: NNN.N TC Time constant (0.0: no lag) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ 0.5 – 115.0 s H: 0.5 H Sampling cycle (min. 0.5 sec. increments) ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0 – 8 N: 8 N Number of samples to be calculated (0: dead time = 0)

ITEM 11

X1 X0211 – e –Ls

X0 (s) = X1 (s) 1 + Ts

L = H N (dead time)

Page 53: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

53SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

68 Accumulator (momentary value input) 68ABBR: QNT

General DescriptionUsed to continuously totalize analog signals and also as a preset counter.• With Interrupt SW S2 set to ‘1’, the module does not count.• With Reset SW S1 set to ‘1’, accumulated value is reset to ‘0’, while the Preset Value Reached Signal Y1 is turned off.• The accumulated value output Q0 returns automatically to 0 counts when the counter reaches 10000 counts. Fractions are

not dropped but added.• If the accumulated value output Q0 is connected to an analog input terminal of another function block, 10000 counts are

equal to 100.00%.

Setting Example You have a range of 0 – 150 m3/h as momentary value. You need 150 counts per hour, that is 1 count per 1 m3. ITEM 13: 150 (counter rate K) ITEM 14: 2 (time unit C)If you need 1500 counts per hour (1 count per 0.1 m3): ITEM 13: 1500 (counter rate K)

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 04 ▲ 0.00 – 100.00 21: NNN.NN Q0 Accumulated value output

(0 to 10000 counts are represented as 0.00 to 100.0%) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 06 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Interrupt SW (1: interrupt) 07 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Preset value reached output 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 68 MD: 68 ACCUMULATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ● 0 – 10000 PS: NNNN PS Preset value ★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K: NNNNN.NN K Counter rate (Set the number of counts you need the module counts

with continuous 100% status for ‘C’ time duration [ITEM 14]) ★ 14 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C: N C Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour, 3: day)

ITEM 11 ITEM 13 – 14

ITEM 12

Accum. ValueOutput

Preset ValueReached

21Accumulated Value Output

01

COUNTER RATE SET. Q0Momentary Value

X1 PRESET COUNTER

10000

PRESET VALUE

InterruptInterrupt SW

S2

11Preset Value Reached

Y1

02 Reset

Preset ValueReached

S2

S1Reset SWS1

Y1

0

Q0

t

Page 54: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

54SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

69 Ramp Program Setter 69ABBR: PRG

General DescriptionRamp programming is done by setting ramp rates.• Run SW S1 operates with ‘1’, the program starts with reference input X1 and initial value A0.• Run SW S1 resets Y1, Y2 and Y3 with ‘0’. Output value X0 holds the output before reset.• The program stops where it is when the Hold SW S2 is turned to ‘1’.• The ‘Hold’ timer can be forcibly ended with an one-shot input of ‘Go to Next Stage’ SW S3.• If you set a ramp rate Kn = 0, other parameters concerning this ramp (Cn, An, Tn and Pn) are disregarded.• If you do not use (do not connect) a reference input X1, the program starts at the initial value A0 in the ramp rate K1.If you have the X1, it starts at the initial value X1 in the ramp rate K1. However, if the K1 is set to a positive value and the X1 is greater than the Hold value A1, or if the K1 is set to a negative value and the X1 is smaller than the A1, the Y3 (X1 error status) is turned to ‘1’ and the program does not start.

ITEM 11

21 X0

X1

Reference Input

Y2

S1

Y1

X0

t

T5T3T2T1A0

K1A5

K2

A1

K3

A2

K5

A3

01

S1 (Run)

02

S2 (Hold)

03

S3 (Go to Next Stage)

13

Y3 (X1 Input Error)

12

Y2 (Holding)

11

Y1 (Reached to Final Stage)

Page 55: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

55SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [72 – 79] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Run SW (0: reset, 1: run) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Hold SW (1: hold) 06 ▲ 0, 1 S3: N S3 Go to next stage SW (force-end the intermediate hold timer) 07 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Reached to final stage 08 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Holding 09 ▲ 0, 1 Y3: N Y3 X1 input error ★ 10 ▲ 69 MD: 69 RAMP PROGRAM SETTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±115.00 % A0: NNN.NN A0 Initial value ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 %/C1 K1: NNN.NN K1 Ramp rate ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0, 1, 2 C1: N C1 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour) ◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Hold value ◆ ★ 16 ▲ 0 – 1000 T1: NNNN T1 Hold time ◆ ★ 17 ▲ 0, 1, 2 P1: N P1 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour)◆ ★ 18 ▲ ±115.00 %/C2 K2: NNN.NN K2 Ramp rate ◆ ★ 19 ▲ 0, 1, 2 C2: N C2 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour)◆ ★ 20 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Hold value ◆ ★ 21 ▲ 0 – 1000 T2: NNNN T2 Hold time◆ ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2 P2: N P2 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour) ◆ ★ 23 ▲ ±115.00 %/C3 K3: NNN.NN K3 Ramp rate ◆ ★ 24 ▲ 0, 1, 2 C3: N C3 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour)◆ ★ 25 ▲ ±115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Hold value◆ ★ 26 ▲ 0 – 1000 T3: NNNN T3 Hold time◆ ★ 27 ▲ 0, 1, 2 P3: N P3 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour) ◆ ★ 28 ▲ ±115.00 %/C4 K4: NNN.NN K4 Ramp rate◆ ★ 29 ▲ 0, 1, 2 C4: N C4 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour) ◆ ★ 30 ▲ ±115.00 % A4: NNN.NN A4 Hold value◆ ★ 31 ▲ 0 – 1000 T4: NNNN T4 Hold time ◆ ★ 32 ▲ 0, 1, 2 P4: N P4 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour) ◆ ★ 33 ▲ ±115.00 %/C5 K5: NNN.NN K5 Ramp rate◆ ★ 34 ▲ 0, 1, 2 C5: N C5 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour)◆ ★ 35 ▲ ±115.00 % A5: NNN.NN A5 Hold value◆ ★ 36 ▲ 0 – 1000 T5: NNNN T5 Hold time◆ ★ 37 ▲ 0, 1, 2 P5: N P5 Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour)

Page 56: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

56SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

70 High/Low Limiter 70ABBR: HLL

General Description: Used to limit analog input signal within a preset range.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 70 MD: 70 HIGH/LOW LIMITER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 High limit◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Low limit

ITEM 11

X0

X1

A2

A1

21X1

X0

Page 57: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

57SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

71 Deviation Limiter 71ABBR: DVL

General Description Used to calculate deviation between two analog inputs and limit the deviation within a preset range.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Reference input ★ 10 ▲ 71 MD: 71 DEVIATION LIMITER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (error if not connected) ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 High deviation limit◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Low deviation limit

ITEM 12

X0Deviation (X2 – X1)A2

A1

21

X2

Reference Input

ITEM 11

X1

X0

Page 58: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

58SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

18 Input Selector (with ramp control at switching) 18ABBR: SFT

General DescriptionUsed to select and output either one of two analog inputs.

OperationWhen S1 is set, the output X0 starts to track the selected input X1 or X2 at a ramp rate A1 or X3.• With S1 = ‘0’, the input X1 is selected.• With the ramp rate set to 0, the output immediately tracks the selected input.• External ramp rate X3: Data range 0 – 10000 is converted into 0 – 100%. A1 is used when X3 is not connected. With negative

input, the ramp rate equals 0. GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Select SW (0: select X1, 1: select X2) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Ramp rate A1 / X3 SW 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input 09 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s X3: NNN.NN X3 Ramp rate by remote setting ★ 10 ▲ 18 MD: 18 INPUT SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ◆★ 13 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s A1: 3.50 A1 Ramp rate ★ 14 ▲ GGNN 3#: 2321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 12

X2

ITEM 14

X3

X021

01 02

S1 (Select Switch) S2 Ramp Rate A1/X3 SW(A1 is used when S2 = ‘0’)

X2

X1

X0

S1

tRamp Rate A1 (X3)

Input

t

Output

Ramp rate control to track the new input signal once it is switched by S1.

External Ramp Rate Input

Page 59: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

59SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

19 Output Selector 19ABBR: OTS

General Description Used to route an input to a specified channel of 8 outputs.• S1 through S8 correspond respectively to Xo 1 through Xo 8.• ITEM 12 set value is output at unconnected terminals.• If more than one switch is selected, higher switch number (S1...S8) prevails.• S1 through S8 are set to ‘0’ at cold start.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 04 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input ★ 10 ▲ 19 MD: 19 OUTPUT SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

X2 is provided to non-selected channels. 0% is output if not connected. 21 ▲ 0, 1 01: N S1 Select SW 22 ▲ 0, 1 02: N S2 Select SW 23 ▲ 0, 1 03: N S3 Select SW 24 ▲ 0, 1 04: N S4 Select SW 25 ▲ 0, 1 05: N S5 Select SW 26 ▲ 0, 1 06: N S6 Select SW 27 ▲ 0, 1 07: N S7 Select SW 28 ▲ 0, 1 08: N S8 Select SW

01

S1

02

S2

03

S3

04

S4

05

S5

06

S6

07

S7

08

S8

21 Xo 1

22 Xo 2

23 Xo 3

24 Xo 4

25 Xo 5

26 Xo 6

27 Xo 7

28 Xo 8

ITEM 12

X2

ITEM 11

X1

Input signal to be output to non-selected terminals

Input signal to be output to selected terminals

Page 60: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

60SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

72 Input Selector (2 points) 72ABBR: INS

General DescriptionUsed to select and output either one of two analog inputs.With S1 = ‘0’, the input X1 is selected.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Select SW (0: select X1) 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input ★ 10 ▲ 72 MD: 72 INPUT SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

■Signal HoldThe output signal can be held if you connect the output X0 to the input X2 and turn Select SW S1 on as shown in the figure below.

X1

X2

X0

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 12

X2

X021

01

S1 (Select Switch)

Page 61: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

61SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

85 Input Selector (8 points) 85ABBR: INE

General Description Used to select and output either one of eight analog inputs.• S1 through S8 correspond respectively to the input X1 through X8. With none selected, the output X0 equals 0%.• With more than one switch is set to ‘1’, larger number channel among S1 through S8 is valid.• The input X1 must be connected. Error is given if not connected.• If the connected input connection terminal is not registered, the output X0 equals 0%.• S1 through S8 are set to ‘0’ as default value at cold start.

ITEM 13

X3

01

S1

02

S2

03

S3

04

S4

05

S5

06

S6

07

S7

08

S8

ITEM 14

X4

ITEM 15

X5

21 X0

ITEM 12

X2

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 16

X6

ITEM 17

X7

ITEM 18

X8

Page 62: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

62SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output ★ 10 ▲ 85 MD: 85 8-POINT INPUT SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1222 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 14 ▲ GGNN 4#: 1322 X4 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 5#: 1421 X5 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 16 ▲ GGNN 6#: 1422 X6 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 17 ▲ GGNN 7#: 1521 X7 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 18 ▲ GGNN 8#: 1522 X8 connection terminal (no connection allowed) 21 ▲ 0, 1 01: N S1 X1 select SW 22 ▲ 0, 1 02: N S2 X2 select SW 23 ▲ 0, 1 03: N S3 X3 select SW 24 ▲ 0, 1 04: N S4 X4 select SW 25 ▲ 0, 1 05: N S5 X5 select SW 26 ▲ 0, 1 06: N S6 X6 select SW 27 ▲ 0, 1 07: N S7 X7 select SW 28 ▲ 0, 1 08: N S8 X8 select SW

Page 63: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

63SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

73 Maximum Value Selector 73ABBR: MAX

General DescriptionUsed to select and output the largest of three analog inputs.Status monitor output Y1 – Y3 indicates which input is currently selected.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 X1 being selected 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 X2 being selected 06 ▲ 0, 1 Y3: N Y3 X3 being selected 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input 09 ▲ ±115.00 % X3: NNN.NN X3 Input ★ 10 ▲ 73 MD: 73 MAXIMUM VALUE SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1421 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 12

X2 X0

ITEM 13

X3

21X0 = MAX (X1, X2, X3)

11

Y1 (X1 being selected)

12

Y2 (X2 being selected)

13

Y3 (X3 being selected)

Page 64: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

64SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

74 Minimum Value Selector 74ABBR: MIN

General Description Used to select and output the smallest of three analog inputs.Status monitor output Y1 – Y3 indicates which input is currently selected.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 X1 being selected 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 X2 being selected 06 ▲ 0, 1 Y3: N Y3 X3 being selected 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input 09 ▲ ±115.00 % X3: NNN.NN X3 Input ★ 10 ▲ 74 MD: 74 MINIMUM VALUE SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1321 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1421 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed)

ITEM 11

X1

ITEM 12

X2 X0

ITEM 13

X3

21X0 = MIN (X1, X2, X3)

11

Y1 (X1 being selected)

12

Y2 (X2 being selected)

13

Y3 (X3 being selected)

Page 65: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

65SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

75 Parameter Selector (2 points) 75ABBR: CTS

General DescriptionUsed to select and output either one of two parameters.With S1 = ‘0’, the parameter A1 is selected.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Select SW (0: select A1, 1: select A2) ★ 10 ▲ 75 MD: 75 PARAMETER SELECTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ◆ ★ 11 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 Parameter ◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Parameter

A1

A2

X021

01

S1 (Select Switch)

Page 66: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

66SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

86 Parameter Generator (8 points) 86ABBR: CTE

General Description: Eight constant parameters are generated.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 86 MD: 86 PARAMETER GENERATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ◆ ★ 11 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN A1 Parameter◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±115.00 % 22: NNN.NN A2 Parameter ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 % 23: NNN.NN A3 Parameter◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±115.00 % 24: NNN.NN A4 Parameter◆ ★ 15 ▲ ±115.00 % 25: NNN.NN A5 Parameter◆ ★ 16 ▲ ±115.00 % 26: NNN.NN A6 Parameter◆ ★ 17 ▲ ±115.00 % 27: NNN.NN A7 Parameter◆ ★ 18 ▲ ±115.00 % 28: NNN.NN A8 Parameter

ITEM 11 A1

ITEM 12 A2

ITEM 13 A3

ITEM 14 A4

ITEM 15 A5

ITEM 16 A6

24 Ao 4

25 Ao 5

26 Ao 6

ITEM 17 A7

ITEM 18 A8

27 Ao 7

28 Ao 8

21 Ao 1

22 Ao 2

23 Ao 3

Page 67: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

67SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

76 High/Low Alarm 76ABBR: PVA

General DescriptionThe block provides alarm contact outputs for high and low limit.Both output Y1 and Y2 respectively have hysteresis (deadband) A3.There is no interference between high setpoint A1 and low setpoint A2.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 High alarm output 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Low alarm output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 76 MD: 76 HIGH/LOW ALARM (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 High setpoint ◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Low setpoint ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Hysteresis (deadband)

ITEM 11

21 X0 ( = X1)

X1

‘0’

A2Input X1

‘1’

Y2 A3

12

Y2 (Low Limit)

11

Y1 (High Limit)

‘0’

A1

‘1’

Y1 A3

Page 68: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

68SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

77 Deviation Alarm 77ABBR: DVA

General Description: The block provides alarm contact outputs for the deviation of two input signals.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output (deviation) 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 High deviation alarm output 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Low deviation alarm output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Reference input 08 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input ★ 10 ▲ 77 MD: 77 DEVIATION ALARM (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1222 X2 connection terminal (error if not connected)◆ ★ 13 ▲ ±115.00 % A1: NNN.NN A1 High setpoint ◆ ★ 14 ▲ ±115.00 % A2: NNN.NN A2 Low setpoint ◆ ★ 15 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Hysteresis (deadband)

ITEM 11

21 X0 ( = X2 – X1)

X1

ITEM 12

Reference Input

InputX2

‘0’

A2Deviation (X2 – X1)

‘1’

Y2 A3

12

Y2 (Low Deviation Limit)

11

Y1 (High Deviation Limit)

‘0’

A1

‘1’

Y1 A3

Deviation Output

Page 69: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

69SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

78 Rate of Change Alarm 78ABBR: VRA

General DescriptionThe block calculates the difference between the present sample value X1 (K) with another X1 (K−N) stored N samples before, and divides it by the elapsed time (H x N [seconds]) to obtain its rate of change.If the rate of change is greater than the positive rate A1, the output Y1 turns to ‘1’.If the rate of change is smaller than the negative rate A2, the output Y2 turns to ‘1’.Both setpoints respectively have hysteresis A3.Negative direction setpoint A2 must be set to a positive value.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output (change rate) 04 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Positive direction alarm output 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Negative direction alarm output 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 78 MD: 78 RATE OF CHANGE ALARM (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ 0.5 – 115.0 s H: 0.5 H Sampling cycle (min. 0.5 sec. increments) ★ 13 ▲ 1 – 8 N: 8 N Number of samples to be calculated ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s A1: 3.50 A1 Positive direction setpoint ◆ ★ 15 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s A2: 3.50 A2 Negative direction setpoint◆ ★16 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % A3: NNN.NN A3 Hysteresis (deadband)

ITEM 11

21 X0 (Rate of Change)X1

12

Y2 (Negative Direction)

11

Y1 (Positive Direction)

X1(K) – X1(K – N)X0 = H x N

Page 70: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

70SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

79 Parameter Setter 79ABBR: PMS

General Description When Set Command SW S1 is turned to ‘1’, the module rewrites parameters in specified function blocks.• Changeable parameters (ITEM) are marked with ‘◆’ in the Function Block List (2 byte data only).• Decimal point position of an analog range will be disregarded. The one used in the rewritten ITEM will be used.• Written parameters can be read at the analog terminals 21, 22 and 23.• Typical applications of External Parameters: - Setting PID parameters using Ai Receive Terminal. - Changing function parameters - Changing parameters for a math function module according to the result of another function module.

WARNING !Use OUTPUT SHOT commands for S1 and S2.Parameters in each function block can be rewritten approx. one hundred thousand (100,000) times (according to nominal specification of the EEPROM).For example, if you rewrite a parameter every one hour, the EEPROM is usable approx. eleven years.Please consider this information carefully when you design an application of this function block.When setting ITEM No. for each output connecting terminal, do not use contact (0, 1) or 1 byte (-128 to 127) numbers.

ITEM 17

X1

G1 (to specified GROUP/ITEM)

01

S1 (Set Command)

02

S2 (Read Command)

A parameter is written by S1 set command.The written parameter is read in the following computation cycle and is output as an analog signal.S2 read command is also available.

A1

Parameter

ITEM 18

X2

G2 (to specified GROUP/ITEM)A2

ITEM 19

X3

G3 (to specified GROUP/ITEM)A3

21 G1 (Read Value)

22 G2 (Read Value)

23 G3 (Read Value)

Page 71: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

71SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Set command SW 05 ▲ ±115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input 06 ▲ ±115.00 % X2: NNN.NN X2 Input 07 ▲ ±115.00 % X3: NNN.NN X3 Input ★ 10 ▲ 79 MD: 79 PARAMETER SETTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGII G1: 3014 G1 output connection terminal

GG: Group No. II: Item No. ★ 12 ▲ GGII G2: 3114 G2 output connection terminal ★ 13 ▲ GGII G3: 3215 G3 output connection terminal INTERNAL PARAMETER SETTING Data range corresponds to that used in the destination ITEM (decimal point not included) ★ 14 ▲ ±32000 A1: XXXXX A1 Parameter ★ 15 ▲ ±32000 A2: XXXXX A2 Parameter ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 A3: XXXXX A3 Parameter EXTERNAL PARAMETER SETTING GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. (analog or discrete) With GGNN = 0 or no connection, internal parameter setting will have a priority. ★ 17 ▲ GGNN X1: 1101 X1 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 18 ▲ GGNN X2: 1221 X2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN X3: 1321 X3 connection terminal (no connection allowed) PARAMETER READING

20 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Read command SW 21 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: 0.14 G1 Read value (Remark 1) 22 ▲ ±115.00 % 22: 1.00 G2 Read value (Remark 1) 23 ▲ ±115.00 % 23: 12.34 G3 Read value (Remark 1)

Remark 1: Decimal Point PositionAnalog data is provided automatically with two decimal places. However, actual decimal point position depends upon data of the destination. For example, if you read the proportional band of a PID control as 100%, 1.00 is indicated. Likewise, if you read a gain of a computing module, the gain 1.234 will be indicated as 12.34.

Page 72: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

72SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

80 Numeral Converter 80ABBR: BCD

General DescriptionThe input value is converted and output at the specified numeric terminal. It may not be converted appropriately if a terminal other than one for analog signal is used.

ITEM 11

ITEM 15

21SCALING X0 (Analog Value)X1 NUMERAL CONVERSION

22 X0 (Hexadecimal)

23 X0 (Octal)

24 X0 (Binary)

25 X0 (Decimal)

26 X0 (BCD)

GG Send to Do Send Terminal

CONVERTIBLE NUMERALS• Analog value: ±115.00% accumulated value (0 – 10000)• Binary (16 digits)• Octal (6 digits)• Hexadecimal (4 digits)• Decimal (7 digits)• BCD (7 digits)

Page 73: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

73SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output indication (analog value) 04 ▲ 0000 – FFFF 22: NNNN X0 Output indication (hexadecimal) 05 ▲ 000000 – 177777 23: NNNNNN X0 Output indication (octal) 06 ▲ 00.... – 11.... 24: NN.... X0 Output indication (binary, 16 digits) (13 upper digits) 07 ▲ 0 – 1000000 25: NNNNNNN X0 Output indication (decimal, 7 digits) 08 ▲ 0.000000 – 1000000 26: NNNNNNN X0 Output indication (BCD, 7 digits) 09 ▲ NNNNN.... X1: NNNNN... Input indication (according to numeral of input) ★ 10 ▲ 80 MD: 80 NUMERAL CONVERTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. INPUT

★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

Set N = 00 when input from Di/Do communication terminal. ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 IN: N Numeral of input signal

0: analog value 3: binary (16 digits) 1: hexadecimal (4 digits) 4: decimal (7 digits) 2: octal (6 digits) 5: BCD (7 digits)

OUTPUT

★ 15 ▲ GG (11 – 26) GG: 12 G1 output connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. of Do communication terminal

★ 16 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 OT: N Numeral of output signal 0: analog value 3: binary (16 digits) 1: hexadecimal (4 digits) 4: decimal (7 digits) 2: octal (6 digits) 5: BCD (7 digits)

SCALING

★ 17 ▲ 0, 1, 2 SC: N Scaling mode (0: without, 1: with span, 2: with offset + span) SCALING RANGE WITH ANALOG INPUT (decimal point position for BCD output) ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 MH: 15000 Upper range (at 100% input) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 ML: 0 Lower range (at 0% input) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DP: 1 Decimal point position (from rightmost position) SCALING RANGE BETWEEN NUMERALS OTHER THAN ANALOG SIGNAL

★ 23 ▲ NNNN.....N X1: 0 X1 value ★ 24 ▲ NNNN.....N Y1: 0 Y1 value ★ 25 ▲ NNNN.....N X2: FFFF X2 value ★ 26 ▲ NNNN.....N Y2: 1000000 Y2 value

Remarks:With ITEM 12 ‘Numeral of input signal’ set to ‘1: hexadecimal (4 digits)’, add ‘0’ at the top of the value for ITEM 23 ‘X1 value’ or ITEM 25 ‘X2 value’, if it should start with ‘D.’Apply the same principle for ITEM 24 ‘Y1 value’ or ITEM 26 ‘Y2 value’, with ITEM 15 ‘Numeral of output signal’ set to ‘1: hexadecimal (4 digits)’.

■ Scaling of Analog Input (mode 1: with span)Analog input (0 – 100.00%) is converted into engineering unit value by its span. Zero point is equal to 0.A typical application of this scaling function is to “indicate analog signal in an engineering unit on the Digital Indicator (model: ABD)”.

ANALOG INPUT ➔ SCALING: INPUT% x (MH – ML) ➔ OUTPUT NUMERAL CONVERSION ➔ OUTPUT

Only when the converted result is output in BCD, decimal point position and negative range can be included in the scaling. When it is output in decimals, negative range is included. When the value converted into an engineering unit is output in other numeral systems, negative range is output as 0.

Page 74: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

74SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Scaling of Analog Input (mode 2: with span + offset)Analog input (0 – 100.00%) is converted into engineering unit value by its span and offset.

ANALOG INPUT ➔ SCALING: INPUT% x (MH – ML) + ML ➔ OUTPUT NUMERAL CONVERSION ➔ OUTPUT

Only when the converted result is output in BCD, decimal point position and negative range can be included in the scaling. When it is output in decimals, negative range is included. When the value converted into an engineering unit is output in other numeral systems, absolute value of negative range is output.

■Scaling of Numerals Other Than Analog InputThe value is scaled without minus sign or decimal point. The scaling is performed according to data between two points as shown in the figure below.

The numeral system of analog value at the analog output terminal ‘21’ is the same as that of output signal.If you need to use an input signal in a numeral other than analog for some computa-tion block, first convert the signal into analog utilizing this numeral conversion block. Then input the converted analog signal to the computation block and then send the result back to another numeral conversion block.

■ Signal Assignment in the Communication Terminal Block for Discrete I/O

ASSIGN.DECIMAL* BCD HEXADECIMAL OCTAL BINARY

ASSIGN.Weight (W) W Contents W Contents W Contents Weight Contents

1 1 1 Decimal point position (from LSB)

1 LSD 1 LSD 1 LSD 1 2 2 2 2 x 1 2 x 1 2 2nd LSD 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 3rd LSD 3 4 8 1 (±) Sign 8 1 2nd LSD 8 4th LSD 4 5 16 1 LSD 1 2nd LSD 2 x 8 16 5th LSD 5 6 32 2 x 1 2 x 16 4 32 6th LSD 6 7 64 4 4 1 3rd LSD 64 7th LSD 7 8 128 8 8 2 x 64 128 8th LSD 8 9 256 1 2nd LSD 1 3rd LSD 4 256 9th LSD 910 512 2 x 10 2 x 256 1 4th LSD 512 10th LSD 1011 1024 4 4 2 x 512 1024 11th LSD 1112 2048 8 8 4 2048 12th LSD 1213 4096 1 3rd LSD 1 4th LSD 1 5th LSD 4096 13th LSD 1314 8192 2 x 100 2 x 4096 2 x 4096 8192 14th LSD 1415 16384 4 4 4 16384 15th LSD 1516 32768 8 8 1 x 32768 32768 16th LSD 1617 65536 1 4th LSD LSB = Least Significant Bit18 131072 2 x 1000 LSD = Least Significant Digit19 262144 420 524288 8 * With decimal output setting, the range 0...1000000 is output in 20 bits.

Negative range is represented in 2’s complements. Bit 21...32 turn ‘1.’21 1 5th LSD22 Reserved 2 x 1000023 424 825 1 6th LSD26 Reserved 2 x 10000027 428 8

29 Reserved1

7h LSDx 1000000

3031 Reserved Reserved32

XX2X1

Y1

Y2

Y

(X1, Y1)

(X2, Y2)

INPUT (numeral system of input)

OUTP

UT (n

umer

al sy

stem

of o

utpu

t)

Page 75: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

75SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

81 Weight Totalizer 81ABBR: QWT

General DescriptionThe block is used for a hopper scale to totalize ingredient weight by adding total weight and subtracting tare weight.• Setting Reset SW to ‘1’ will adjust the totalized value to ‘0’.• Add SW and Subtract SW will be provided by shot signals in Sequential Control block.• Measured signal will be totalized by Add SW, while subtracted by Subtract SW.• Totalized Value Output Q0, in addition mode, continues counting even after the counter reaches 10000. It returns to 0 only

if the counts still exceeds 10000 after a subtraction signal is received and applied. The fractions of 10000 counts will not be dropped but added at this point.

• ‘1 Cycle Completed’ output Y1 is connected to a Counter block so that it can totalize the weight. When the accumulation of Q0 signal reaches 10000 and returns to 0 count, the Y1 is turned on for 1 computation cycle duration.

• If you connect the Totalized Value Output Q0 to an analog input terminal of another function block, 10000 counts will be converted as 100.00%.

It is recommended that application is designed so that the totalized value remains within the maximum value of 10000.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 04 ▲ 0 – 10000 21: NNNNN Q0 Totalized value output 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 06 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Add SW (1: add) 07 ▲ 0, 1 S3: N S3 Subtract SW (1: subtract) 08 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 1 cycle complete output 09 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % X1: NNN.NN X1 Input ★ 10 ▲ 81 MD: 81 WEIGHT TOTALIZER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No.

ITEM 11

Totalized ValueOutput

Explanation below.

21Totalized Value Output

03

ADD/SUBTRACT. TOTALIZER Q0

Momentary ValueX1

10000

SubtractSubtract SW

S3

111 Cycle Complete

Y1

01 Reset

1 CycleComplete

S3

S1Reset SWS1

Y1

Q0

t

02 Add S2Add SW

S2

Page 76: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

76SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

82 Analog/Pulse Duration Converter 82ABBR: ADT

General DescriptionThe ON/OFF output duration ratio, in a constant cycle duration, is proportional to the input signal.• With the input below 0%, the output Y1 is set to ‘0’ for a whole cycle duration. With the input over 100%, the output Y1 is set

to ‘1’ for a whole cycle duration.• While Reset SW is set to ‘0’, the output Y1 repeatedly turns on and off (‘1’ - ‘0’) according to the input X1.• The minimum time resolution is 0.1 second. However, it cannot be shorter than the computation cycle.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) 05 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Pulse duration output ★ 10 ▲ 82 MD: 82 ANALOG/PULSE DURATION CONVERTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ◆ ★ 12 ● 0 – 1000 s CT: NNNN CT Pulse cycle time

ITEM 11

ITEM 12

Explanation below.

21Output

01

CYCLE

X0 ( = X1)Input

X1

ANALOG/PULSE DURATION CONVERTER

Pulse DurationOutput

Reset SWS1 11

Pulse Duration Output

Y1

Reset SW

Y1

S1

ON

ITEM 12

CYCLE

ITEM 12

CYCLE

OFF

Page 77: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

77SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

83 Analog Signal Hold 83ABBR: AMM

General DescriptionUsed to hold either of the maximum, the minimum or the momentary value of an input signal.• With Reset SW S1 set to ‘1’, the output X0 equals the input X1. To reset, use a shot command ON signal in Sequential Control

block.• The momentary value hold mode: the momentary value is stored in memory with an one-shot input S1.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ ±115.00 % 21: NNN.NN X0 Output 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Reset SW (1: reset) ★ 10 ▲ 83 MD: 83 ANALOG SIGNAL HOLD (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1#: 1221 X1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1, 2 MM: N Hold mode (0: minimum, 1: momentary, 2: maximum)

ITEM 11

21Output

X0Input

X1 MEMORY

01

S1 (Reset SW)

X0 = X1 in reset

Page 78: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

78SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

84 ITEM Reader 84ABBR: ITR

General DescriptionUsed to read parameters, analog values, switch status and internal computation value from ITEMs of another GROUP.

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 84 MD: 84 ITEM READER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGII G1: 3014 G1 connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. II: Item No. ★ 12 ▲ GGII G2: 3114 G2 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 13 ▲ GGII G3: 3215 G3 connection terminal (no connection allowed) ★ 14 ▲ GGII G4: 3326 G4 connection terminal (no connection allowed) 21 ▲ NNNNNN 21: 14 G1 Read value (Remark 1) 22 ▲ NNNNNN 22: -100 G2 Read value (Remark 1) 23 ▲ NNNNNN 23: 1234 G3 Read value (Remark 1) 24 ▲ NNNNNN 24: 12345 G4 Read value (Remark 1)

Remark 1: ITEM 21 – 24 are indicated in 16-bit binary. Therefore, the decimal point of the original ITEM location is lost. If another block enters a value from the ITEM for which only positive range is available (for example, 0 – 64000) and then this block reads the value, it is converted and indicated as ap-prox. ±320.00%.

ITEM 13

ITEM 14

24 G4 Read Value

23 G3 Read Value

22 G2 Read Value

21 G1 Read Value

ITEM 12

ITEM 11

ITEM G1 Value in Another Group

ITEM G2 Value in Another Group

ITEM G3 Value in Another Group

ITEM G4 Value in Another Group

Page 79: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

79SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

87 Contact Distributor 87ABBR: DCN

General DescriptionUsed to connect 1 point discrete input to 1 point discrete output.• 8 pairs can be specified without utilizing Sequential Control Program block.• Beneficial for connecting directly between a Field Terminal and a Communication Terminal.

8i 8oNN

G#: GG G#: GG

NNITEM 25 ITEM 26

1i 1oNN

G#: GG

CONTACT DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK

G#: GG

NNITEM 11 ITEM 12

Input

INPUT OUTPUT

Destination

2i 2oITEM 13 ITEM 14

Page 80: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

80SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 87 MD: 87 CONTACT DISTRIBUTOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN 1I : GGNN 1i Input terminal

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ GGNN 1O: GGNN 1o Destination terminal ★ 13 ▲ GGNN 2I : GGNN 2i Input terminal ★ 14 ▲ GGNN 2O: GGNN 2o Destination terminal ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 3I : GGNN 3i Input terminal ★ 16 ▲ GGNN 3O: GGNN 3o Destination terminal ★ 17 ▲ GGNN 4I : GGNN 4i Input terminal ★ 18 ▲ GGNN 4O: GGNN 4o Destination terminal ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 5I : GGNN 5i Input terminal ★ 20 ▲ GGNN 5O: GGNN 5o Destination terminal ★ 21 ▲ GGNN 6I : GGNN 6i Input terminal ★ 22 ▲ GGNN 6O: GGNN 6o Destination terminal ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 7I : GGNN 7i Input terminal ★ 24 ▲ GGNN 7O: GGNN 7o Destination terminal ★ 25 ▲ GGNN 8I : GGNN 8i Input terminal ★ 26 ▲ GGNN 8O: GGNN 8o Destination terminal 31 ▲ 0, 1 D1: N 1i (Di 1) Discrete input 32 ▲ 0, 1 D2: N 2i (Di 2) Discrete input 33 ▲ 0, 1 D3: N 3i (Di 3) Discrete input 34 ▲ 0, 1 D4: N 4i (Di 4) Discrete input 35 ▲ 0, 1 D5: N 5i (Di 5) Discrete input 36 ▲ 0, 1 D6: N 6i (Di 6) Discrete input 37 ▲ 0, 1 D7: N 7i (Di 7) Discrete input 38 ▲ 0, 1 D8: N 8i (Di 8) Discrete input

Page 81: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

81SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

88 Analog Signal Comparator 88ABBR: ACP

General DescriptionUsed to compare an analog input with a preset parameter (reference) or with another analog input. 8 channels are available.• Commands (Cn) 1 : An Larger than (>) Rn

2 : An Equal to (=) Rn

3 : An Smaller than (<) Rn

• References (Rn) With Mode (Mn) : 0, Reference (Rn) is a preset parameter (±115.00%) With Mode (Mn) : 1, Reference (Rn) is an input terminal number (GGNN).

11Y1Comparison Result OutputOutput

R1Reference

M1Mode

C1Command

A1Input

Y1

12Y2R2M2C2A2 Y2

13Y3R3M3C3A3 Y3

14Y4R4M4C4A4 Y4

15Y5R5M5C5A5 Y5

16Y6R6M6C6A6 Y6

17Y7R7M7C7A7 Y7

18Y8R8M8C8A8 Y8

01S1

02S2

03S3

Comparator Cancel SW

Input

Output = 0 SW

Output = 1 SW

ITEM 11

A1

ITEM 16

A2

ITEM 46

A8

GROUP [30 – 61] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Comparator cancel SW (1: cancel) 04 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Output = 0 command SW 05 ▲ 0, 1 S3: N S3 Output = 1 command SW ★ 10 ▲ 88 MD: 88 ANALOG SIGNAL COMPARATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ GGNN A1: GGNN A1 Input connection terminal (error if not connected)

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C1: N C1 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N M1 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 14 ▲ ±115.00 % or R1: NNNNNN R1 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 15 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Comparison result output

Page 82: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

82SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 16 ▲ GGNN A2: GGNN A2 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 17 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C2: N C2 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N M2 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 19 ▲ ±115.00 % or R2: NNNNNN R2 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 20 ▲ 0, 1 Y2: N Y2 Comparison result output ★ 21 ▲ GGNN A3: GGNN A3 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C3: N C3 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 23 ▲ 0, 1 M3: N M3 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 24 ▲ ±115.00 % or R3: NNNNNN R3 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 25 ▲ 0, 1 Y3: N Y3 Comparison result output ★ 26 ▲ GGNN A4: GGNN A4 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 27 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C4: N C4 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 28 ▲ 0, 1 M4: N M4 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 29 ▲ ±115.00 % or R4: NNNNNN R4 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 30 ▲ 0, 1 Y4: N Y4 Comparison result output ★ 31 ▲ GGNN A5: GGNN A5 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 32 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C5: N C5 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 33 ▲ 0, 1 M5: N M5 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 34 ▲ ±115.00 % or R5: NNNNNN R5 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 35 ▲ 0, 1 Y5: N Y5 Comparison result output ★ 36 ▲ GGNN A6: GGNN A6 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 37 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C6: N C6 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 38 ▲ 0, 1 M6: N M6 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 39 ▲ ±115.00 % or R6: NNNNNN R6 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 40 ▲ 0, 1 Y6: N Y6 Comparison result output ★ 41 ▲ GGNN A7: GGNN A7 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 42 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C7: N C7 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 M7: N M7 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 44 ▲ ±115.00 % or R7: NNNNNN R7 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 45 ▲ 0, 1 Y7: N Y7 Comparison result output ★ 46 ▲ GGNN A8: GGNN A8 Input connection terminal (no connection allowed) GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 47 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 C8: N C8 Command (0: none, 1: larger, 2: equal, 3: smaller) ★ 48 ▲ 0, 1 M8: N M8 Mode (reference signal type) (0: % value, 1: connection terminal GGNN) ★ 49 ▲ ±115.00 % or R8: NNNNNN R8 Reference signal (% value or connection terminal) GGNN GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. 50 ▲ 0, 1 Y8: N Y8 Comparison result output

Page 83: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

83SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

89 Annunciator 89ABBR: ANN

General Description: Annunciator block for alarm.1. Discrete input mode• Normally Open (N.O.): Abnormality when the contact is turned on. ➔ Lamp starts blinking.• Normally Closed (N.C.): Abnormality when the contact is turned off. ➔ Lamp starts blinking.

2. Alarm mode• Non-Latching: If the discrete input is back to normal, the lamp stops blinking and the buzzer sound turns off even before

the Acknowledge button is turned on.• Latching: Even after the discrete input is back to normal, the lamp continues blinking and the buzzer sound continues until

the Acknowledge button is turned on.• Double-Latching: Even after the discrete input is back to normal, the lamp continues blinking and the buzzer sound continues

until the Acknowledge button is turned on. When the Acknowledge button is pressed after the discrete input has been back to normal, the lamp remains on (continuously) until the Lamp Reset button is pressed.

01Discrete Input

S1 21Lamp Output

Y1

02S2 22 Y2

10S10 30 Y10

16S16 36 Y16

17Acknowledge Button

PB

18Lamp Test Button

LT

19Lamp Reset Button

(needed with double-latching type)

LR

37Alarm Buzzer

BZ

BZ

PB

Yn

Sn

■ ALARM OPERATION

Blinking Continuously ON

BZ

PB

Yn

Sn

LATCHING TYPE

BZ

LR

PB

Yn

Sn

DOUBLE-LATCHING TYPE

BZ

PB

Yn

Sn

NON-LATCHING TYPE

Lamp output Yn resetting by lamp reset button LR is valid only when Sn input is in normal status.

Page 84: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

84SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

3. First-out functionFirst-out function is used to find the discrete contact signal which turned first among several.The lamp for the one which turned in the first computation cycle blinks though the lamps for the others which turned in the following computation cycles are continuously on. When the Acknowledge button is pressed, the lamp for the first one stops blinking.When a new series of alarm is triggered, the lamps changes status according to the First-Out function.This function is available for Latching and Double-Latching alarm modes.

4. Communication terminal assignment of the I/O contacts.• Discrete inputs/lamp outputs can be assigned in 16-point unit to a Di Receive Terminal or Do Send Terminal.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 89 MD: 89 ANNUNCIATOR (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ 0, 1 SM: N Discrete input mode (0: N.O., 1: N.C.) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1, 2 MD: N Alarm mode (0: non-latching, 1: latching, 2: double-latching) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 FO: N First-Out (0: without, 1: with) ◆ ★ 14 ▲ 1 – 64 CP: NN Lamp ON-OFF time (multiple of computation cycle) ★ 15 ▲ 00, 11 – 26 SN: NN Group No. of Communication Terminal for discrete inputs

(S1 – S16) (00: without) ★ 16 ▲ 0, 1 SP: N Assigned group of Communication Terminal for discrete inputs

(S1 – S16) (0: 1 – 16, 1: 17 – 32) ★ 17 ▲ 0, 1 SS: N Assignment of pushbutton input to Communication Terminal

(0: without, 1: with) (Remark 1) ★ 18 ▲ 00, 11 – 26 YN: NN Group No. of Communication Terminal for discrete outputs

(Y1 – Y16) (00: without) ★ 19 ▲ 0, 1 YP: N Assigned group of Communication Terminal for discrete outputs

(Y1 – Y16) (0: 1 – 16, 1: 17 – 32) ★ 20 ▲ 0, 1 YS: N Assignment of buzzer output to Communication Terminal (0: without, 1: with) (Remark 2) 21 ▲ 0, 1 01: N S 1 Discrete input indication 22 ▲ 0, 1 02: N S 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : 30 ▲ 0, 1 10: N S10 : : : : : : : 36 ▲ 0, 1 16: N S16 : 37 ▲ 0, 1 17: N Acknowledge button PB 38 ▲ 0, 1 18: N Lamp test button LT 39 ▲ 0, 1 19: N Lamp reset button LR 41 ▲ 0, 1 21: N Y 1 Lamp output indication 42 ▲ 0, 1 22: N Y 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 ▲ 0, 1 30: N Y10 : : : : : : : 56 ▲ 0, 1 36: N Y16 : 57 ▲ 0, 1 37: N Alarm buzzer sound BZ

Remark 1: With ITEM 17 ‘Assignment of pushbutton input to Communication Terminal’ set to ‘1: with’, the pushbutton is assigned to a discrete input next to S1...S16, i.e. the 17th terminal of Di Receive Terminal or Do Send Terminal. In this case, ITEM 16 must be set to ‘0: 1 – 16’.Remark 2: With ITEM 20 ‘Assignment of buzzer output to Communication Terminal’ set to ‘1: with’, the buzzer is assigned to a lamp output next to Y1...Y16, i.e. the 17th terminal of Do Send Terminal. In this case, ITEM 19 must be set to ‘0: 1 – 16’.

Page 85: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

85SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

90 ON-OFF Timer 90ABBR: TMC

General DescriptionThe discrete output Y1 is turned on/off repeatedly in the preset time duration.• The minimum duration is 0.1 second, provided it is longer than the computation cycle.• While Run SW S1 is set to ‘1’, the Y1 is turned on/off repeatedly.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0 – 10000 OT: NNNNN Elapsed ON time count 04 ▲ 0 – 10000 FT: NNNNN Elapsed OFF time count 05 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Run SW (1: run) 06 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Discrete output ★ 10 ▲ 90 MD: 90 ON-OFF TIMER (model) ‘-’ to clear.◆ ★ 11 ▲ 0 – 10000 ON: NNNNN ON time setting◆ ★ 12 ▲ 0 – 10000 OF: NNNNN OFF time setting ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 TU: N TU Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour, 3: 0.1 sec)

ITEM 11

01

Output

Run SWS1

11Discrete Output

Y1

Run SW

Y1OFF

ON

S1

ITEM 12

RepeatON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Page 86: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

86SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

91 Timer 91ABBR: TMR

General DescriptionUsed to count number of pulse rises of the internal clock (every 0.1 sec.) and output Complete status signal Y1 ON (‘1’) when it reaches the setpoint.The counter can be started by turning on the S1 to ‘1’, and be reset by turning it off (‘0’). Counting is halted when the S2 is set to ‘1’.The minimum resolution when the time unit (TU) is set to ‘seconds’ is equal to the computation cycle. When the cycle is 0.12 second, the minimum resolution will be 0.25 second.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0 – 10000 MT: NNNNN MT Elapsed time count 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Count SW (0: reset, 1: count) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Interrupt SW (1: interrupt) 06 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Complete status ★ 10 ▲ 91 MD: 91 TIMER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ◆ ★ 11 ▲ 0 – 10000 Y: NNNNN Y Time setting ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3 TU: N TU Time unit (0: sec, 1: min, 2: hour, 3: 0.1 sec)

22Time Setting

Y

21Time Count

MT

SET VALUE

Count SW

Interrupt SW

S1

S2

Complete Y1

ON OFF

Reached

01

S1 (Count)

02

S2 (Interrupt)

11

Y1 (Complete)

ITEM 11

INTERRUPTED

Page 87: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

87SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

92 Counter 92ABBR: CTR

General DescriptionUsed to count number of pulse rises of input signal while Run SW S1 is on (‘1’). When it reaches the setpoint, it outputs Complete status signal Y1 ON (‘1’).The Y1 signal is reset by turning off the S1 (‘0’).

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 0 – 10000 MT: NNNNN MT Count value 04 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Run SW (0: reset, 1: run) 05 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Pulse input SW 06 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Complete status ★ 10 ▲ 92 MD: 92 COUNTER (model) ‘-’ to clear. ◆ ★ 11 ▲ 0 – 10000 SC: NNNNN SC Count setting

22Setting

SC

21Measuring Value

MT

SET VALUE

Run

Pulse

S1

S2

Complete Y1

ON OFF

01

S1 (Run)

02

S2 (Pulse)

11

Y1 (Complete)

Reached

ITEM 11

Page 88: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

88SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

93 Internal Switch 93ABBR: ISW

General DescriptionThe block is used in a sequential control to store calculation status of a logic calculation in progress.

GROUP [30 – 61] ◆: Automatically changeable parameters ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ★ 10 ▲ 93 MD: 93 INTERNAL SWITCH (model) ‘-’ to clear. ◆ 11 ▲ 0, 1 01: N S1 Internal switch ◆ 12 ▲ 0, 1 02: N S2 Internal switch ◆ 13 ▲ 0, 1 03: N S3 Internal switch ◆ 14 ▲ 0, 1 04: N S4 Internal switch ◆ 15 ▲ 0, 1 05: N S5 Internal switch ◆ 16 ▲ 0, 1 06: N S6 Internal switch ◆ 17 ▲ 0, 1 07: N S7 Internal switch ◆ 18 ▲ 0, 1 08: N S8 Internal switch

01 S1

02 S2

03 S3

04 S4

05 S5

06 S6

07 S7

08 S8

Page 89: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

89SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

94 System’s Internal Switch 94ABBR: SSW

General DescriptionThe system determines the most appropriate switch status for the user’s application.

GROUP [80] ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 10 ▲ 94 MD: 94 SYSTEM’S INTERNAL SWITCH (model) ‘-’ to clear. 11 IND 0, 1 01: N S1 ‘1’ with cold start 12 IND 0, 1 02: N S2 ‘1’ with hot start 13 IND 1 03: 1 S3 Always ‘1’ 14 IND 0 04: 0 S4 Always ‘0’ 15 IND 0, 1 05: N S5 ‘0’ / ‘1’ repeated every 0.5 second 16 IND 0, 1 06: N S6 ‘0’ / ‘1’ repeated every 1 second 17 IND 0, 1 07: N S7 ‘1’ for the period of one computation cycle after start-up 18 IND 0, 1 08: N S8 Reserved for the system

Note: The System’s Internal Switch block, registered in Group 80 at default setting, cannot be deleted.

01 S1

02 S2

03 S3

04 S4

05 S5

06 S6

07 S7

08 S8

(‘1’ with cold start)

(‘1’ with hot start)

(Always ‘1’)

(Always ‘0’)

(‘0’ / ‘1’ repeated every 0.5 sec.)

(‘0’ / ‘1’ repeated every 1 sec.)

(‘1’ for the period of one computation cycle after start-up)

(Not used)

Page 90: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

90SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

MODEL NO. BLOCK NAME MODEL NO.

95 Sequential Control Program 95ABBR: SEQ

General Description The block is used for relay sequence control and step sequence control by utilizing sequence commands.

GROUP [81 – 92] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 03 ▲ 00 – 19 ST: NN Step No. 04 ▲ 0 – 999 s TS: NNN Step timer setting 05 ▲ 0 – 999 s TM: NNN Elapsed step timer count 06 ▲ 0, 1 S1: N S1 Run SW 07 ▲ 0, 1 S2: N S2 Cancel ‘go to next step’ SW 08 ▲ 0, 1 Y1: N Y1 Step timer complete status ★ 10 ▲ 95 MD: 95 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL PROGRAM (model) ‘-’ to clear. ★ 11 ▲ CCGGNN 13: 0000 Sequence command (Step Command for ITEM 11) ★ 12 ▲ CCGGNN CC: GGNN : : : : : : CC: Command : : : : : GG: Group No. ★ 99 ▲ CCGGNN CC: GGNN : NN: Terminal No.

21 X0

01

S1 (Run)

02

S2 (Cancel ‘Go to Next Step’)Always ‘1’ for Group 81.Turn this SW to ‘1’ via a sequence program of another Group for Group 82 – 92.

11

Y1 (Step Timer Complete)

SEQUENCE COMMANDS

C C G G N N••••

C C G GN N

Total 89 commands 0.01 – 0.19% isoutput for Step No. 0 – 19.

: Command: Group No.: Terminal No.

Step No. Output

Page 91: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

91SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Command List

FUNCTION ABBR COMMAND EXPLANATION CC GG NNEND ED 00 00 00 End of a block (described in the last ITEM)CONDITIONING COMMANDS

INPUT IN 01 GG NN The first contact in a relay circuitINPUT NOT NI 02 GG NN The first contact in a relay circuit (true in an opposite condition)AND AD 03 GG NN Series contact in a relay circuitAND NOT NA 04 GG NN Series contact in a relay circuit (true in an opposite condition)OR OR 05 GG NN Parallel contact in a relay circuitOR NOT NR 06 GG NN Parallel contact in a relay circuit (true in an opposite condition)OUTPUT COMMANDS

OUTPUT OT 07 GG NN Equivalent to a coil in a relay circuitOUTPUT NOT NO 08 GG NN Equivalent to a coil in a relay circuit (true in an opposite condition)OUTPUT ON ON 09 GG NN Equivalent to a set coil in a relay circuitOUTPUT OFF OF 10 GG NN Equivalent to a reset coil in a relay circuitOUTPUT SHOT SH 11 GG NN One-shot output in a relay circuit • Turned on for the duration of only one computation cycle. • Max. 100 types of outputs in all Groups.BRANCH COMMAND

BRANCH BR 12 GG SS If condition is true, go to a specified step in a specified block (GG: block No., SS: step No.) SS: 01 – 19

12 00 SS If condition is true, go to a specified step in the same block (GG = 00, 00 specifies the same block) SS: 01 – 19

STEP COMMAND

STEP ST 13 00 SS Declare step No. (SS: step No., 00 – 19) • Any number can be assigned for SS. Used in order from the smallest number. • SS: 00 Operates at any time (relay sequence) • SS: 01 – 19 Either one of SS’s operates (step sequence)STEP TIMER

TIMER TM 14 U NNN Step timer

Timer type 0: ON-delay timer (to the following step when completed.

A BRANCH command prevails if it comes before the time elapsed. Invalid if a BRANCH command with no condition is used.) 1: Step watch timer (Y1 = 1 when completed) Time setting (0 – 999 seconds)NOP NP 15 00 00 No control operation (used when you need to delete commands without changing other

ITEM No.s)

Page 92: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

92SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Configuration of 12 Sequential Control Blocks

LINKING BETWEEN GROUPSIf you need for your program more than available 89 commands in one Group, you can link between one Group and another. Total 1,068 commands are available if all Groups are linked.• Relay Sequence (Step 00): Results at a certain stage of sequence are written in the Internal Switch block. These results

are picked up as input to another Group so that it continues the sequence.• Step Sequence (Step 01 – 19): A Branch command is used to link with another Group. Only Steps 01 – 19 are available for

linking.

S1 (RUN SW)• The S1 for Group 81 are always set to ‘1’. The ones for Group 82 – 92 are set to ‘0’ at the start. A command from another

sequence program turn the S1 to ‘1’ when it is used.• With S1 at ‘1’, Step 00 and 01 starts operating.• With S1 at ‘0’, the operation is stopped and returns to Step 01.

S2 (cancel ‘Go to next step’ SW)• With S2 at ‘1’, the operation continues within the step currently in operation.• With S2 at ‘0’, the operation restarts where it was stopped.• In a step sequence, the S2 is turned to ‘1’ when the operation is branched to another Group.• In a step sequence, the S2 is turned to ‘0’ before the operation is branched to another Group if the S2 of this another group

is set to ‘1’.

STEP 00

STEP 01

STEP 02

Step Sequence

Relay Sequence

STEPs in a GROUP(89 commands, 00 – 19 steps)

GROUP CONFIGURATION(12 groups)

COMMANDs in a STEP

STEP 19

END

G81

G82

G92

STEP 00

Page 93: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

93SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Example of Sequence Control Program

■ Processing a Logic Operation Command without Input AddressConditioning commands without input (GGNN = 0000) address are used in case of the following:Max. 8 INPUT, INPUT NOT commands can be used in series. Operations between registers are executed in order from the last programmed register No.

INPUT

00 Declaring STEP 00. Used always.

Describing Terminal No. (e.g. )

AND OUTPUT

INPUT

STEP

S1

OR S2

AND S3

OUTPUT Y1

END END command at the end of ITEM.

N

0

N

N

N

0

N

0

N

N

N

0

G

0

G

G

G

0

G

0

G

G

G

0

01

13

05

03

07

00

12

11

DATAITEM

13

14

15

16

S1 S3

S2

Y1

OR

1110

INPUT S1 Input to Register 11

INPUT S2 Input to Register 22

OR S3 OR Operation with Register 23

AND 0000 AND Operation between Register 1 and 24

OUTPUT Y1 Output the Result to Y15

6

7

8

Ring Type Resistor

S1 S2

S3

Y1

Page 94: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

94SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

■ Operation Example within One Step

NEXT STEP

(1) 1 step command

PREVIOUS STEP

STEP COMMAND

NEXT STEP

...Only 1 command

... Output ON for example

(Go to next after 1 computation cycle.)

(2) 1 step timer

PREVIOUS STEP

STEP TIMER COMPLETED?

NEXT STEP

STEP

...Only 1 timer

YES (Go to next when completed.)

(3) Step with output only

PREVIOUS STEP

OUTPUT COMMAND

NEXT STEP

STEP

...Only 1 output

(Go to next after output.)

(4) Step with conditioning only

PREVIOUS STEP

CONDITION COMMAND

NEXT STEP

STEP

YES (Go to next when condition is met.)

NO

(5) Describing condition after output

PREVIOUS STEP

CONDITION COMMAND

NEXT STEP

STEP

OUTPUT COMMAND

YES (Go to next when condition is met.)

NO

... Output ON for example

(6) Describing output after conditioning

PREVIOUS STEP

CONDITION COMMAND

OUTPUT COMMAND

STEP

YES

CONDITION COMMAND

OUTPUT COMMAND

NEXT STEP

YES (Output when the last condition in the Step is met, and go to next.)

NO

NO

(7) Branching with multiple conditions

PREVIOUS STEP

CONDITION COMMAND

BRANCH COMMAND

STEP

YES

To specified Group or Step

CONDITION COMMAND

YES

NO

NO

Page 95: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

95SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR MODEL NO. I/O TYPEF70 SC100 Ai 6 + Ao 4 + Di/Pi 6 + Do 6 Field Terminal Extension Field Terminal 1 Extension Field Terminal 2F71 SC200 Ai 6 + Ao 4 + Di/Pi 6 + Do 6 Field Terminal Extension Field Terminal 1 Extension Field Terminal 2F72 SC110 Ai 6 + Ao 4 + Di/Pi 6 + Do 6 Field Terminal Extension Field Terminal 1 Extension Field Terminal 2F73 SC210 Ai 6 + Ao 4 + Di/Pi 6 + Do 6 Field Terminal Extension Field Terminal 1 Extension Field Terminal 2F24 SML-A4 Di 8F25 SML-C7 Do 8F25 SML-C8 Do 8F26 SML-E5 Di 4 + Do 4F27 SML-G3 Ai 8F28 SML-G4 Ai 4F29 SML-M4 Ao 4F14 SML-P4 Pi 4F31 SML-R3 Ai 4 + Ao 4F32 SML-S5 Ai 4 + Di 4F33 SML-S6 Ao 4 + Do 4

3. FIELD TERMINAL BLOCKS

Page 96: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

96SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F70 SC100 Field Terminal F70

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 97: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

97SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL

Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

Remark 1: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 98: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

98SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F70 SC100 Extension Field Terminal 1 F70

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 99: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

99SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 100: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

100SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain)

Page 101: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

101SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F70 SC100 Extension Field Terminal 2 F70

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

SC 1.40

Page 102: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

102SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 QA 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN Qi 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 103: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

103SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) SC 1.40

Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 104: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

104SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F71 SC200 Field Terminal F71

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 105: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

105SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL (Remark 1) Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

Remark 1: Control by a host device connected via Modbus prevails the local setting.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 3: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 106: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

106SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F71 SC200 Extension Field Terminal 1 F71

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 107: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

107SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 108: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

108SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain)

Page 109: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

109SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F71 SC200 Extension Field Terminal 2 F71

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

SC 1.40

Page 110: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

110SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 111: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

111SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) SC 1.40

Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 112: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

112SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F91 SC200W Field Terminal F91

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 113: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

113SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL (Remark 1) Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) ★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button ★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button

Remark 1: Control by a host device connected via Modbus prevails the local setting.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 3: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 114: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

114SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F91 SC200W Extension Field Terminal 1 F91

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 115: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

115SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 116: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

116SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain)

Page 117: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

117SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F91 SC200W Extension Field Terminal 2 F91

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

Page 118: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

118SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 119: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

119SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 120: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

120SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F72 SC110 Field Terminal F72

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 121: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

121SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL

Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

Remark 1: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 122: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

122SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F72 SC110 Extension Field Terminal 1 F72

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

Backup Status15BACKUPCHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 123: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

123SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 124: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

124SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain) BACKUP (Mv 2)

80 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MVB: NNN.NN Manual loading MV ★ 81 ▲ 0, 1 BSW: NNN.NN Automatic switching (0: disable, 1: enable) ★ 82 ▲ 0, 1 BMD: NNN.NN Backup output mode (0: track back, 1: preset value) ★ 83 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s BVL: NNN.NN Output rate-of-change limit (0.00: no limit applied) ★ 84 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % BFV: NNN.NN Preset value (applied with ITEM 82 DATA 1) ★ 85 ▲ 0, 1 BBL: N Backup recovery mode (0: auto tracking, 1: manual tracking) ★ 86 ▲ 2, 3 BGR: N Backup GROUP 87 ▲ 0, 1 15: N Backup status (0: normal, 1: backup) SC 1.50

Page 125: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

125SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F72 SC110 Extension Field Terminal 2 F72

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

SC 1.40

Page 126: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

126SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 127: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

127SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) SC 1.40

Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 128: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

128SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F73 SC210 Field Terminal F73

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 129: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

129SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL (Remark 1) Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) SC 1.70

★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button SC 1.70

Remark 1: Control by a host device connected via Modbus prevails the local setting.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 3: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 130: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

130SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F73 SC210 Extension Field Terminal 1 F73

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

Backup Status15BACKUPCHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 131: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

131SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 132: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

132SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain) BACKUP (Mv 2)

80 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MVB: NNN.NN Manual loading MV ★ 81 ▲ 0, 1 BSW: NNN.NN Automatic switching (0: disable, 1: enable) ★ 82 ▲ 0, 1 BMD: NNN.NN Backup output mode (0: track back, 1: preset value) ★ 83 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s BVL: NNN.NN Output rate-of-change limit (0.00: no limit applied) ★ 84 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % BFV: NNN.NN Preset value (applied with ITEM 82 DATA 1) ★ 85 ▲ 0, 1 BBL: N Backup recovery mode (0: auto tracking, 1: manual tracking) ★ 86 ▲ 2, 3 BGR: N Backup GROUP 87 ▲ 0, 1 15: N Backup status (0: normal, 1: backup) SC 1.50

Page 133: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

133SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F73 SC210 Extension Field Terminal 2 F73

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

SC 1.40

Page 134: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

134SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 135: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

135SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) SC 1.40

Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 136: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

136SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F93 SC210W Field Terminal F93

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error)

Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 included 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) INDICATION

★ 11 ▲ 2, 3 GR: 2 Primary loop Group No. (valid after reset) ★ 12 ▲ 0, 1 M1: N Primary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 13 ▲ 0, 1 M2: N Secondary MV operational range (0: ±115%, 1: -15 – +115%) ★ 15 ▲ GGNN 1F: 3121 FN1 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 16 ▲ ±32000 1H: 15000 FN1 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 17 ▲ ±32000 1L: 0 FN1 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 18 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1D: 1 FN1 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 19 ▲ GGNN 2F: GGNN FN2 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 20 ▲ ±32000 2H: NNNNN FN2 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 21 ▲ ±32000 2L: NNNNN FN2 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 22 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2D: N FN2 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 3F: GGNN FN3 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 24 ▲ ±32000 3H: NNNNN FN3 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 25 ▲ ±32000 3L: NNNNN FN3 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 26 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3D: N FN3 decimal point position (from rightmost digit) ★ 27 ▲ GGNN 4F: GGNN FN4 connection terminal for indication

GG: Group No. NN: terminal No. ★ 28 ▲ ±32000 4H: NNNNN FN4 upper range (in engineering unit) ★ 29 ▲ ±32000 4L: NNNNN FN4 lower range (in engineering unit) ★ 30 ▲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 4D: N FN4 decimal point position (from rightmost digit)

ITEM 19

AL2 Lamp Output02

FN2 Indication

ITEM 15FN1 Indication

ITEM 23FN3 Indication

ITEM 27FN4 Indication

AL1 Lamp Output01

AL4 Lamp Output04

AL3 Lamp Output

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW 03

10

09

12

11

Manual to Auto Switching Suppression SW

Local to Cascade Switching Suppression SW

SP DOWN Button Operation Suppression SW

SP UP Button Operation Suppression SW

06

05

08

07

Primary Loop

Secondary Loop

Page 137: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

137SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 31 ▲ alphanumeric T1: XXX...X FN1 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 32 ▲ alphanumeric T2: XXX...X FN2 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 33 ▲ alphanumeric T3: XXX...X FN3 tag name (max. 10 characters)★ 34 ▲ alphanumeric T4: XXX...X FN4 tag name (max. 10 characters) ★ 35 ▲ alphanumeric U1: XXX...X FN1 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 36 ▲ alphanumeric U2: XXX...X FN2 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 37 ▲ alphanumeric U3: XXX...X FN3 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) ★ 38 ▲ alphanumeric U4: XXX...X FN4 engineering unit (max. 8 characters) 39 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N AL1 lamp output 40 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N AL2 lamp output 41 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N AL3 lamp output 42 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N AL4 lamp output ★ 43 ▲ alphanumeric L1: XXXX AL1 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 44 ▲ alphanumeric L2: XXXX AL2 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 45 ▲ alphanumeric L3: XXXX AL3 comment (max. 4 characters) ★ 46 ▲ alphanumeric L4: XXXX AL4 comment (max. 4 characters) CONTROL (Remark 1) Primary Loop 51 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 52 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 53 ▲❄ 0, 1 07: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 54 ▲❄ 0, 1 08: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Secondary Loop 55 ▲❄ 0, 1 09: N Local to Cascade switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 56 ▲❄ 0, 1 10: N Manual to Auto switching suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 57 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N SP UP button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) 58 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N SP DOWN button operation suppress. SW (0: permit, 1: prohibit) Common Items 61 ▲ 0, 1 21: 0 SP UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 62 ▲ 0, 1 22: 0 SP DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 63 ▲ 0, 1 23: 0 MV UP button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) 64 ▲ 0, 1 24: 0 MV DOWN button operation status (0: OFF, 1: ON) ★ 71 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding SP UP or DOWN button ★ 72 ▲ 10 – 100 s/100% ST: 40 Time of holding MV UP or DOWN button

Remark 1: Control by a host device connected via Modbus prevails the local setting.Remark 2: ITEM 61 – 64: Please perform button operations with two times more than computation cycle.Remark 3: ITEM 61 – 64: Obtains button operation status regardless of screen functions such as A/M and C/L.

Page 138: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

138SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F93 SC210W Extension Field Terminal 1 F93

ITEM 25Mv 1

Mv 1 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Check Input

13

27

CHECK

4 – 20mA

ITEM 26Mv 2

Mv 2 Error Contact Output

Mv 1 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Connection Terminal

Mv 2 Check Input

14

28

21

CHECK

4 – 20mA

Pv 1

Pv 1 Error Contact Output

Pv 1 Input

11CHECK

universal

23Ai 1 Ai 1 Input1 – 5V

24Ai 2 Ai 2 Input1 – 5V

25Ai 3 Ai 3 Input1 – 5V

26Ai 4 Ai 4 Input1 – 5V

22Pv 2

Pv 2 Error Contact Output

Pv 2 Input

12CHECK

Backup Status15BACKUPCHECK

universal

ITEM 27Ao 1 Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5VITEM 28

Ao 2 Ao 2 Connection Terminal1 – 5V

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

ITEM 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 30, 31

ITEM 32, 33

4–

3+

6–

5+

9–

8+

7+

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ao COM

52–

51+

50+

49+

48+

Ai COM

43

44

42A1

B1

C1

46

47

45A2

B2

C2

Page 139: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

139SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [04] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 12 MD: 12 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Pv 1 input 12 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Pv 2 input 13 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 1 input 14 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 2 input 15 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 25: NNN.NN Ai 3 input 16 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 26: NNN.NN Ai 4 input 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 27: NNN.NN Mv 1 check input 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 28: NNN.NN Mv 2 check input 19 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 29: NNN.NNUnit Pv 1 input in engineering unit value 20 ▲❄ ±320.00Unit 30: NNN.NNUnit Pv 2 input in engineering unit value ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV1: NNN.NN Mv 1 output 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MV2: NNN.NN Mv 2 output 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO1: NNN.NN Ao 1 output 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % AO2: NNN.NN Ao 2 output ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL

★ 25 ▲ GGNN M1#: 0225 Mv 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 26 ▲ GGNN M2#: 0225 Mv 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 27 ▲ GGNN A1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

★ 28 ▲ GGNN A2#: 0225 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) GG: Group No. NN : terminal No.

PV / MV SETTING

★ 30 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH1: NNN.NN Pv 1 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 31 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL1: NNN.NN Pv 1 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 32 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PH2: NNN.NN Pv 2 high alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 33 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % PL2: NNN.NN Pv 2 low alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 34 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML1: NNN.NN Mv 1 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 % ML2: NNN.NN Mv 2 deviation alarm setpoint (for error judgment) ★ 36 ▲ MM TP1: MM Pv 1 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM37...39 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 37 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 upper range temperature ★ 38 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT1: NNNN.N Pv 1 lower range temperature ★ 39 ▲ 0, 1 CJ1: N Pv 1 cold junction compensation (0: Without, 1: With)

Page 140: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

140SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 40 ▲ MM TP2: MM Pv 2 input type [MM: input type No.] 12: S 19: Pt100 (JIS ‘97, IEC) 0:-10-10 V 6: K 13: C 20: Pt100 (JIS ‘89) 1: -1-1 V 7: E 14: N 21: JPt100 (JIS ‘89) 2: 0-10 V 8: J 15: U 22: Pt50 (JIS ‘81) 3: 1-5 V 9: T 16: L 23: Ni100 4: 0-1 V 10: B 17: P 24: MS 5: 4-20 mA 11: R 18: PR 25: DS (Set ITEM41...43 for Pv 1 input type 6...23) ★ 41 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 HT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 upper range temperature ★ 42 ▲ -272.0 – 3000.0 LT2: NNNN.N Pv 2 lower range temperature ★ 43 ▲ 0, 1 CJ2: N Pv 2 cold junction compensation (0: without, 1: with) 44 ▲❄ 0, 1 11: N Pv 1 error contact output 45 ▲❄ 0, 1 12: N Pv 2 error contact output 46 ▲❄ 0, 1 13: N Mv 1 error contact output 47 ▲❄ 0, 1 14: N Mv 2 error contact output ANALOG I/O ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 50 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ1: 0.00 Pv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias)★ 51 ▲ ±3.2000 PS1: 1.0000 Pv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 52 ▲ ±115.00 % PZ2: 0.00 Pv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 53 ▲ ±3.2000 PS2: 1.0000 Pv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 54 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 55 ▲ ±3.2000 MS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 56 ▲ ±115.00 % MZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 57 ▲ ±3.2000 MS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 58 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ1: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 59 ▲ ±3.2000 IS1: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 60 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ2: 0.00 Ai 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 61 ▲ ±3.2000 IS2: 1.0000 Ai 2 span adjustment (gain) ★ 62 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ3: 0.00 Ai 3 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 63 ▲ ±3.2000 IS3: 1.0000 Ai 3 span adjustment (gain) ★ 64 ▲ ±115.00 % IZ4: 0.00 Ai 4 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 65 ▲ ±3.2000 IS4: 1.0000 Ai 4 span adjustment (gain) ★ 66 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ1: 0.00 Mv 1 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 67 ▲ ±3.2000 CS1: 1.0000 Mv 1 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 68 ▲ ±115.00 % CZ2: 0.00 Mv 2 check input zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 69 ▲ ±3.2000 CS2: 1.0000 Mv 2 check input span adjustment (gain) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ1: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 71 ▲ ±3.2000 OS1: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 72 ▲ ±115.00 % OZ2: 0.00 Ao 2 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 73 ▲ ±3.2000 OS2: 1.0000 Ao 2 span adjustment (gain) BACKUP (Mv 2)

80 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % MVB: NNN.NN Manual loading MV ★ 81 ▲ 0, 1 BSW: NNN.NN Automatic switching (0: disable, 1: enable) ★ 82 ▲ 0, 1 BMD: NNN.NN Backup output mode (0: track back, 1: preset value) ★ 83 ▲ 0.00 – 115.00 %/s BVL: NNN.NN Output rate-of-change limit (0.00: no limit applied) ★ 84 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % BFV: NNN.NN Preset value (applied with ITEM 82 DATA 1) ★ 85 ▲ 0, 1 BBL: N Backup recovery mode (0: auto tracking, 1: manual tracking) ★ 86 ▲ 2, 3 BGR: N Backup GROUP 87 ▲ 0, 1 15: N Backup status (0: normal, 1: backup)

Page 141: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

141SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F93 SC210W Extension Field Terminal 2 F93

Do 1

11

12

13

14

Di 1 / Pi 1 Di 1 Input

Di 2 / Pi 2 Di 2 Input

Di 3 / Pi 3 Di 3 Input

Di 4 / Pi 4

Di 5 / Pi 5

Di 6 / Pi 6

Di 4 Input

15

01

Do 2 02

Do 3 03

Do 4 04

Do 5 05

RUN Output 06

Di 5 Input

16 Di 6 Input

Do 1 Output

Do 2 Output

Do 3 Output

Do 4 Output

Do 5 Output

RUN Contact Output Forced OFF

ITEM 02 has no error indication. It is indicated in GROUP 01 (Field Terminal).

21 Qi 1 Accumulated Count Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

CONT

ACT I

NPUT

/ LO

W FR

EQUE

NCY

PULS

E INP

UT S

ETTI

NG

22 Qi 2 Accumulated Count Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

23 Qi 3 Accumulated Count Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

24 Qi 4 Accumulated Count Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

25 Qi 5 Accumulated Count Input

35 QA 5 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

26 Qi 6 Accumulated Count Input

36 QA 6 Momentary Value Input

POWER-LAWSCALING

MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSIONMOVING AVERAGE SAMPLE NUMBER

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.

RUN JUDG. LOGIC

High FrequencyPulse Input

35+

34+

36+

37+

38+

+

39–COM

32

33

31EXC

INPUT

COM

17

16

19

18

25

24

11

10

21

20

23

22

Inside ControllerField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 31

ITEM 33, 34

ITEM 35

ITEM 36, 37

ITEM 38

ITEM 39, 40

ITEM 41

ITEM 42, 43

ITEM 44

ITEM 45, 46

ITEM 47

ITEM 48, 49

ITEM 32

ITEM 50

Page 142: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

142SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [05] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) Same mode for Extension Field Terminal 1 and 2 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 10 IND 13 MD: 13 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 11: N or Di 1 input indication or 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated count indication 12 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 12: N or Di 2 input indication or 0 – 9999 22: NNNN Qi 2 accumulated count indication 13 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 13: N or Di 3 input indication or 0 – 9999 23: NNNN Qi 3 accumulated count indication 14 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 14: N or Di 4 input indication or 0 – 9999 24: NNNN Qi 4 accumulated count indication 15 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 15: N or Di 5 input indication or 0 – 9999 25: NNNN Qi 5 accumulated count indication 16 ▲❄ 0, 1 or 16: N or Di 6 input indication or 0 – 9999 26: NNNN Qi 6 accumulated count indication 17 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value indication 18 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 32: NNN.NN QA 2 momentary value indication 19 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 33: NNN.NN QA 3 momentary value indication 20 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 34: NNN.NN QA 4 momentary value indication 21 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 35: NNN.NN QA 5 momentary value indication 22 ▲❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 36: NNN.NN QA 6 momentary value indication DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

23 ▲❄ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 output indication 24 ▲❄ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 output indication 25 ▲❄ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 output indication 26 ▲❄ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 output indication 27 ▲❄ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 output indication 28 ▲❄ 0, 1 06: N RUN contact output forced OFF (1: OFF) PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 31 ▲ PD: NNNNN Di/Pi selection (0 = Di, 1 = Pi) (100 : Di 1, 101 : Di 2, 102 : Di 3, 103 : Di 4, 104 : Di 5) (Remark 1) Di 6 is specified in ITEM 52

★ 32 ▲ 1-16 KR: NN Pi moving average sample number for momentary value conversion ★ 33 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 34 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 36 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 37 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 38 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 39 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 40 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 41 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input)

Page 143: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

143SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 42 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 43 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor ★ 44 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D5: -1 Qi 5 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 46 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S5: N.NNNN Qi 5 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K5: NNNNN.NN QA 5 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 48 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D6: -1 Qi 6 power-law scaling

(10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 49 ▲ 0.0000 – 6.4000 S6: N.NNNN Qi 6 scaling factor ★ 50 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K6: NNNNN.NN QA 6 momentary value conversion factor

(number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) DISCRETE OUTPUT SETTING

★ 51 ▲ 0, 1 DM: N Abnormality contact output mode (0: Normal, 1: All contact outputs OFF at RUN contact OFF)

HIGH SPEED PULSE INPUT SETTING

★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6) Remark 1: ITEM 31: Di/Pi selectionPulse outputs become undefined when ‘Di’ is selected; while discrete outputs become undefined when ‘Pi’ is selected.

Page 144: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

144SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F24 SML-A4 Field Terminal F24

GROUP [01] ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 01: N Di 1 discrete input 12 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 02: N Di 2 : 13 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 03: N Di 3 : 14 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 04: N Di 4 : 15 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 05: N Di 5 : 16 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 06: N Di 6 : 17 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 07: N Di 7 : 18 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 08: N Di 8 :

Inside ModuleField Wiring

Di 1 Discrete Input01Di 1

SCREW TERMINAL

3+

Di 2 Discrete Input02Di 2 4+

Di 3 Discrete Input03Di 3 5+

Di 4 Discrete Input04Di 4 6+

12–

Di 5 Discrete Input05Di 5 9+

Di 6 Discrete Input06Di 6 10+

Di 7 Discrete Input07Di 7 1+

Di 8 Discrete Input08Di 8

COM1

COM2

2+

15–

Page 145: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

145SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F25 SML-C7, -C8 Field Terminal F25

GROUP [01] ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 discrete output 12 ▲ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 : 13 ▲ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 : 14 ▲ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 : 15 ▲ 0, 1 05: N Do 5 : 16 ▲ 0, 1 06: N Do 6 : 17 ▲ 0, 1 07: N Do 7 : 18 ▲ 0, 1 08: N Do 8 :

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Do 1 Discrete Output01Do 1

Do 2 Discrete Output02Do 2

Do 3 Discrete Output03Do 3

Do 4 Discrete Output04Do 4

Do 5 Discrete Output05Do 5

Do 6 Discrete Output06Do 6

Do 7 Discrete Output07Do 7

Do 8 Discrete Output08Do 8

3

4

5

6

12

9

10

1

COM1

COM2

2

15

Page 146: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

146SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F26 SML-E5 Field Terminal F26

GROUP [01] ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 01: N Di 1 discrete input 12 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 02: N Di 2 : 13 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 03: N Di 3 : 14 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 04: N Di 4 :DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

31 ▲ 0, 1 21: N Do 1 discrete output 32 ▲ 0, 1 22: N Do 2 : 33 ▲ 0, 1 23: N Do 3 : 34 ▲ 0, 1 24: N Do 4 :

Inside ModuleField Wiring

01

SCREW TERMINAL

21

Di 1 Discrete InputDi 1 3+

Di 2 Discrete Input02Di 2 4+

Di 3 Discrete Input03Di 3 5+

Di 4 Discrete Input04Di 4 6+

12–COM1

Do 1 Discrete OutputDo 1

Do 2 Discrete Output22Do 2

Do 3 Discrete Output23Do 3

Do 4 Discrete Output24Do 4

9

10

1

COM2

2

15

Page 147: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

147SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F27 SML-G3 Field Terminal F27

26Ai 6

25Ai 5

28Ai 8

27Ai 7

24Ai 4

23Ai 3

22Ai 2

21Ai 11 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ai 1 Analog Input

Ai 2 Analog Input

Ai 3 Analog Input

Ai 4 Analog Input

Ai 5 Analog Input

Ai 6 Analog Input

Ai 7 Analog Input

Ai 8 Analog Input

3+

4+

5+

6+

12–

9+

10+

1+

COM

COM

2+

15–

Page 148: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

148SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 input indication 22 ▲ ❄ : 22: : Ai 2 : 23 ▲ ❄ : 23: : Ai 3 : 24 ▲ ❄ : 24: : Ai 4 : 25 ▲ ❄ : 25: : Ai 5 : 26 ▲ ❄ : 26: : Ai 6 : 27 ▲ ❄ : 27: : Ai 7 : 28 ▲ ❄ : 28: : Ai 8 :ANALOG INPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 31 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 32 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 33 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ai 2 zero ★ 34 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ai 2 span ★ 35 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ai 3 zero ★ 36 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ai 3 span ★ 37 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ai 4 zero ★ 38 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ai 4 span ★ 39 ▲ ±115.00 % 5Z: 0.00 Ai 5 zero ★ 40 ▲ ±3.2000 5S: 1.0000 Ai 5 span ★ 41 ▲ ±115.00 % 6Z: 0.00 Ai 6 zero ★ 42 ▲ ±3.2000 6S: 1.0000 Ai 6 span ★ 43 ▲ ±115.00 % 7Z: 0.00 Ai 7 zero ★ 44 ▲ ±3.2000 7S: 1.0000 Ai 7 span ★ 45 ▲ ±115.00 % 8Z: 0.00 Ai 8 zero ★ 46 ▲ ±3.2000 8S: 1.0000 Ai 8 span

Page 149: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

149SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F28 SML-G4 Field Terminal F28

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 input indication 22 ▲ ❄ : 22: : Ai 2 : 23 ▲ ❄ : 23: : Ai 3 : 24 ▲ ❄ : 24: : Ai 4 :ANALOG INPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 31 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 32 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 33 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ai 2 zero ★ 34 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ai 2 span ★ 35 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ai 3 zero ★ 36 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ai 3 span ★ 37 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ai 4 zero ★ 38 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ai 4 span

Ai 2

Ai 1

Ai 4

Ai 3

24

23

22

211 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ai 1 Analog Input

Ai 2 Analog Input

Ai 3 Analog Input

Ai 4 Analog Input

9+

10+

1+

COM

2+

15–

Page 150: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

150SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F29 SML-M4 Field Terminal F29

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

03 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 01: NNN.NN Ao 1 output indication 04 ▲ : 02: : Ao 2 : 05 ▲ : 03: : Ao 3 : 06 ▲ : 04: : Ao 4 : 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL GG: GROUP NO., NN: TERMINAL NO. ★ 20 ▲ GGNN 1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 21 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1121 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 22 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1122 Ao 3 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 23 ▲ GGNN 4#: 1221 Ao 4 connection terminal (error if not connected)ANALOG OUTPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 36 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 37 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 38 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ao 2 zero ★ 39 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ao 2 span ★ 40 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ao 3 zero ★ 41 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ao 3 span ★ 42 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ao 4 zero ★ 43 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ao 4 span

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

ITEM 20Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Ao 1

ITEM 21Ao 2 Connection TerminalAo 2

ITEM 22Ao 3 Connection TerminalAo 3

ITEM 23Ao 4 Connection TerminalAo 4

3+

4+

5+

6+

12–COM

Page 151: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

151SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F14 SML-P4 Field Terminal F14

Pi 1 21Pulse Input

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Qi 1 Accumulated Value Input

31 QA 1 Momentary Value Input

S1 Reset SW (‘1’ to reset)

3+

COM 12–

ITEM 41, 42POWER-LAW

SCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 31

MOVING AVERAGEITEM 32

01

Pi 2 22Pulse Input

Qi 2 Accumulated Value Input

32 QA 2 Momentary Value Input

S2 Reset SW (‘1’ to reset)

4+

ITEM 43, 44POWER-LAW

SCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 33

MOVING AVERAGEITEM 34

02

Pi 3 23Pulse Input

Qi 3 Accumulated Value Input

33 QA 3 Momentary Value Input

S3 Reset SW (‘1’ to reset)

5+

ITEM 45, 46POWER-LAW

SCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 35

MOVING AVERAGEITEM 36

03

Pi 4 24Pulse Input

Qi 4 Accumulated Value Input

34 QA 4 Momentary Value Input

S4 Reset SW (‘1’ to reset)

6+

ITEM 47, 48POWER-LAW

SCALING

MOMENT. VALUE CONV.ITEM 37

MOVING AVERAGEITEM 38

04

The standard device can accept high frequency of 10 kHz.For mechanical contact input, choose ‘low-pass filter’ type or use of pulse isolator is recommended to eliminate chattering.

Page 152: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

152SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) MOMENTARY VALUE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 31: NNN.NN QA 1 momentary value input indication 12 ▲ ❄ : 32: : QA 2 : 13 ▲ ❄ : 33: : QA 3 : 14 ▲ ❄ : 34: : QA 4 : ACCUMULATED VALUE INPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ ❄ 0 – 9999 21: NNNN Qi 1 accumulated value input indication (unit: count) 22 ▲ ❄ : 22: : Qi 2 : 23 ▲ ❄ : 23: : Qi 3 : 24 ▲ ❄ : 24: : Qi 4 : MOMENTARY VALUE CONVERSION FACTOR (number of pulses per second at 100% momentary value input) ★ 31 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K1: NNNNN.NN QA 1 conversion factor ★ 32 ▲ 1 – 16 V1: 1 QA 1 moving average sample number ★ 33 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K2: NNNNN.NN QA 2 conversion factor ★ 34 ▲ 1 – 16 V2: 1 QA 2 moving average sample number ★ 35 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K3: NNNNN.NN QA 3 conversion factor ★ 36 ▲ 1 – 16 V3: 1 QA 3 moving average sample number ★ 37 ▲ 0.00 – 10000.00 K4: NNNNN.NN QA 4 conversion factor ★ 38 ▲ 1 – 16 V4: 1 QA 4 moving average sample number ACCUMULATED VALUE POWER-LAW SCALING (10’s power 1: x 10, 0: x 1, -1: x 0.1, -2: x 0.01, -3: x 0.001) ★ 41 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D1: -1 Qi 1 power-law scaling ★ 42 ▲ 1.0000 – 6.4000 S1: N.NNNN Qi 1 scaling factor ★ 43 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D2: -1 Qi 2 power-law scaling ★ 44 ▲ 1.0000 – 6.4000 S2: N.NNNN Qi 2 scaling factor ★ 45 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D3: -1 Qi 3 power-law scaling ★ 46 ▲ 1.0000 – 6.4000 S3: N.NNNN Qi 3 scaling factor ★ 47 ▲ 1, 0, -1, -2, -3 D4: -1 Qi 4 power-law scaling ★ 48 ▲ 1.0000 – 6.4000 S4: N.NNNN Qi 4 scaling factor RESET INPUT

51 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 01: N S1 reset SW 52 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 02: N S2 reset SW 53 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 03: N S3 reset SW 54 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 04: N S4 reset SW

Page 153: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

153SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F34 SML-R2 Field Terminal F34

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

22Ai 2

21Ai 11 – 5V

1 – 5V

Ai 1 Analog Input

Ai 2 Analog Input

+ 4

12

+ 5

6

ITEM 51

Ao 1 Connection Terminal4 – 20mA

4 – 20mA

Ao 1

ITEM 52

Ao 2 Connection TerminalAo 2

10

1+

+ 2

11–

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 input indication 12 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Ai 2 input indication ANALOG INPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 21 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 22 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 23 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ai 2 zero ★ 24 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ai 2 span ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

41 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 01: NNN.NN Ao 1 output indication 42 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 02: NNN.NN Ao 2 output indication ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL GG: GROUP NO., NN: TERMINAL NO. ★ 51 ▲ GGNN 1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 52 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1121 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) ANALOG OUTPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 61 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 62 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 63 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ao 2 zero ★ 64 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ao 2 span

Page 154: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

154SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F31 SML-R3 Field Terminal F31

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

24Ai 4

23Ai 3

22Ai 2

21Ai 11 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Ai 1 Analog Input

Ai 2 Analog Input

Ai 3 Analog Input

Ai 4 Analog Input

9+

10+

1+

2+

15–COM

ITEM 51Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Ao 1

ITEM 52Ao 2 Connection TerminalAo 2

ITEM 53Ao 3 Connection TerminalAo 3

ITEM 54Ao 4 Connection TerminalAo 4

3+

4+

5+

6+

12–COM

Page 155: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

155SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 input indication 12 ▲ ❄ : 22: : Ai 2 : 13 ▲ ❄ : 23: : Ai 3 : 14 ▲ ❄ : 24: : Ai 4 : ANALOG INPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 21 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 22 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 23 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ai 2 zero ★ 24 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ai 2 span ★ 25 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ai 3 zero ★ 26 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ai 3 span ★ 27 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ai 4 zero ★ 28 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ai 4 span ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

41 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 01: NNN.NN Ao 1 output indication 42 ▲ : 02: : Ao 2 : 43 ▲ : 03: : Ao 3 : 44 ▲ : 04: : Ao 4 : ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL GG: GROUP NO., NN: TERMINAL NO. ★ 51 ▲ GGNN 1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 52 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1121 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 53 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1122 Ao 3 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 54 ▲ GGNN 4#: 1221 Ao 4 connection terminal (error if not connected) ANALOG OUTPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 61 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 62 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 63 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ao 2 zero ★ 64 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ao 2 span ★ 65 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ao 3 zero ★ 66 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ao 3 span ★ 67 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ao 4 zero ★ 68 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ao 4 span

Page 156: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

156SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F32 SML-S5 Field Terminal F32

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable S MT: S SIMULATION mode: “❄” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model) DISCRETE INPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 11: N Di 1 discrete input 12 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 12: N Di 2 : 13 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 13: N Di 3 : 14 ▲ ❄ 0, 1 14: N Di 4 : ANALOG INPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 21: NNN.NN Ai 1 input indication 22 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 22: NNN.NN Ai 2 : 23 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 23: NNN.NN Ai 3 : 24 ▲ ❄ -15.00 – 115.00 % 24: NNN.NN Ai 4 : ANALOG INPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 31 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ai 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 32 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ai 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 33 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ai 2 zero ★ 34 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ai 2 span ★ 35 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ai 3 zero ★ 36 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ai 3 span ★ 37 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ai 4 zero ★ 38 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ai 4 span

24

23

22

21

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

Ai 1 Analog Input

Ai 2 Analog Input

Ai 3 Analog Input

Ai 4 Analog Input

Di 3 Discrete Input13

Di 2 Discrete Input12

Di 1 Discrete Input11

Di 4 Discrete Input14

Ai 2

Ai 1

Ai 4

Ai 3

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

9+

10+

1+

COM1

2+

15–

Di 1 3+

Di 2 4+

Di 3 5+

Di 4 6+

12–COM2

Page 157: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

157SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

ABBR FIELD TERMINAL ABBR

F33 SML-S6 Field Terminal F33

Inside ModuleField Wiring

SCREW TERMINAL

01 Do 1 Discrete OutputDo 1

Do 2 Discrete Output02Do 2

Do 3 Discrete Output03Do 3

Do 4 Discrete Output04Do 4

9

10

1

COM2

2

15

ITEM 31Ao 1 Connection Terminal

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

1 – 5V

Ao 1

ITEM 32Ao 2 Connection TerminalAo 2

ITEM 33Ao 3 Connection TerminalAo 3

ITEM 34Ao 4 Connection TerminalAo 4

3+

4+

5+

6+

12–COM1

Page 158: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

158SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

GROUP [01] ★: Setting data ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 01 ● (always modifiable) ■ MAINTENANCE SWITCH (lock command) 0 MT: 0 MONITOR mode: data monitoring only 1 MT: 1 PROGRAM mode: “▲” marked data modifiable 02 IND No input ER: NN Error indication (00: normal, 01 – 90: error) 10 IND 11 MD: 11 FIELD TERMINAL (model)DISCRETE OUTPUT INDICATION

11 ▲ 0, 1 01: N Do 1 discrete output 12 ▲ 0, 1 02: N Do 2 : 13 ▲ 0, 1 03: N Do 3 : 14 ▲ 0, 1 04: N Do 4 : ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATION

21 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 01: NNN.NN Ao 1 output indication 22 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 02: NNN.NN Ao 2 : 23 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 03: NNN.NN Ao 3 : 24 ▲ -15.00 – 115.00 % 04: NNN.NN Ao 4 : ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTION TERMINAL GG: GROUP NO., NN: TERMINAL NO. ★ 31 ▲ GGNN 1#: 0225 Ao 1 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 32 ▲ GGNN 2#: 1121 Ao 2 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 33 ▲ GGNN 3#: 1122 Ao 3 connection terminal (error if not connected) ★ 34 ▲ GGNN 4#: 1221 Ao 4 connection terminal (error if not connected) ANALOG OUTPUT ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

★ 41 ▲ ±115.00 % 1Z: 0.00 Ao 1 zero adjustment (zero bias) ★ 42 ▲ ±3.2000 1S: 1.0000 Ao 1 span adjustment (gain) ★ 43 ▲ ±115.00 % 2Z: 0.00 Ao 2 zero ★ 44 ▲ ±3.2000 2S: 1.0000 Ao 2 span ★ 45 ▲ ±115.00 % 3Z: 0.00 Ao 3 zero ★ 46 ▲ ±3.2000 3S: 1.0000 Ao 3 span ★ 47 ▲ ±115.00 % 4Z: 0.00 Ao 4 zero ★ 48 ▲ ±3.2000 4S: 1.0000 Ao 4 span

Page 159: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

159SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4. EXPLANATIONS4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION• Only One Software for All DevicesEvery module in the MsysNet system utilizes one common software, except for the Field Terminal specifically used for each of them. If you learn how to configure one module, you will understand all others.

• No Computer Language: Software Function BlocksThe MsysNet system does not use any specialized computer language, but the “Software Function Blocks”. It incorporates programming concepts for PID controllers, computation modules or PLCs which are familiar to users.

• User-Friendly Parameter Setting SoftwareLoop Configuration Builder software for the SC100/200 Series (model: SFEW3E) is available. With the builder software, you can build configuration files, copy them, save them, and print them.

4.2 RELATION BETWEEN FUNCTION BLOCKS

• Close connection between PID control and sequential control • I/O point expansion via software terminal blocks • Automatic parameters and setpoints change via “Parameter Setter” block

OPERATIONBLOCKS

(parameter setting)

OPERATIONBLOCKS

(timer, counter, internal switch)

OPERATIONBLOCKS

(analog functions)

CONTROLBLOCKS

(2 blocks available)

SEQUENTIALCONTROL BLOCKS(12 blocks available)

LOOP CONTROL(analog signal)

SEQUENTIAL CONTROL(discrete signal)

Parameter TransmissionCommand

FIELD TERMINAL BLOCK (1)

Analog SignalDiscrete SignalParameter Transmission

Pv 1, 2

Ai 1...4

COMMUNICATIONTERMINAL BLOCK (16)

LOOPCOMMUNICATION

Mv 1, 2NestBus, Modbus (SC200/210)

Ao 1, 2

Di 1...5(Pi 1...5)

Pi 6(Di 6)

Do 1...5

FR

ON

T L

CD

DIS

PLA

Y

* Operation blocks: 32 + 8 large operation blocks + 8 batch programs

*

*

*

Sequence Control Command

Software WiringLoop Data for HostCommunication

Page 160: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

160SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4.3 FUNCTION BLOCK ALLOCATIONSCapability of one module of the SC100/200 Series, number and type of function blocks and their allocations, would be well explained if you imagine an instrument panel.

• Number of instruments mountable in one instrument panel is as shown in the figure below. A Group No. means allocation No. in the panel.

• You choose a Group No. and program a Function Block model in ITEM 10. Then all other available ITEMs will be shown according to the function model.

• For the Field Terminal block, users cannot change the model setting.

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

80

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88

89 90 91 92

01

02 03

No. in each block indicates GROUP No.

OPERATIONS BLOCKS (32)Analog functions, parameter setting,timer, counter, internal switch

LARGE OPERATIONS BLOCKS (8)

62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 BATCH PROGRAM BLOCKS (8)

CONTROL BLOCKS (2)

SYSTEM’S INTERNAL SWITCH BLOCK (1)

SEQUENTIAL CONTROL COMMANDS BLOCKS (12)

FIELD TERMINAL BLOCK (1)

04 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 1 BLOCK (1)

05 EXTENSION FIELD TERMINAL 2 BLOCK (1)

00 SYSTEM COMMON TABLE (1)

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 2619 20 21 22COMMUNICATION TERMINAL BLOCKS (16)SC200/210 only

Page 161: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

161SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4.4 CONNECTING BETWEEN FUNCTION BLOCKS

4.4.1 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TERMINALS REPRESENTATION IN A FUNCTION BLOCK

4.4.2 CONNECTING ANALOG SIGNALS• Input signal: Group No. and Terminal No. of the signal you need to input (GGNN) is described in a designated ITEM of the

target function block.• Output signal: Output terminal No. is determined for each function block type.

[Example]If Basic PID block needs to input PV signal from Field Terminal block, the terminal No. of PV signal is represented as 0421 (04: Group No., 21: Terminal No.). Then you write 0421 in ITEM 15 in the PID block.

[Analog Connection Terminal ‘0099’]When one or more analog output terminals in Field Terminal block are not used, set ‘0099’ to these terminals if they give er-rors when not connected.

4.4.3 CONNECTING DISCRETE SIGNALSDiscrete I/O terminals are available in function blocks. You can process these I/O signals via relay logic programs in Sequential Control Program block or via Contact Distributor block.

Relay Logic Program• Discrete input: Discrete input terminal No. is allocated to a coil in relay logic program. It can be input also as discrete signal

of the relay logic.• Discrete output: Discrete output terminal No. pre-determined for each function block type is input as discrete signal of the

relay logic.

Contact DistributorA discrete input is connected to a discrete output just like analog signals. Combination of terminals for discrete input and output is registered in the Contact Distributor block.

4.4.4 PARAMETER SETTERVarious parameters and their output connection terminals (location of the parameter) are preset in Parameter Setter function block and sent when necessary via a trigger signal from Sequential Control Program block.

WARNING !Parameters in the Parameter Setter block are rewritable up to 100 000 times. For example, if parameters are updated every one hour, the memory will reach its usable limit in approx. 11 years.

Input Registered in ITEM 11

Terminal No.

11

01S1

Analog OutputAnalog Input

Discrete Input

02S2Discrete Input

X0

Discrete OutputY1

X1

ITEM 11

21

Page 162: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

162SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4.4.5 ITEM READERParameters are converted into analog signals via this ITEM Reader block.

PARAMETER

21

FUNCTION BLOCK

21

FUNCTIONBLOCK

FUNCTIONBLOCK

ITEM 11

21

ITEM READER

ITEM 11

01

INTERNAL SWITCH

ITEM 11

ITEM 13

PARAMETER

ITEM 14

PARAMETER SETTER

21ITEM 17

SET VALUE

SW STATUS

ITEM 15

SET VALUE

ITEM 14

Connecting an analog signal(Receiver specifies the sender's terminal No.)

Changing a parameter(Sending a set value)

Changing Internal Switch status

Changing a parameterby an external analog signal

(Figures are examples.)

Page 163: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

163SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

4.5 SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION BY COMMUNICATION TERMINALS Communication Terminal blocks are used for sending/receiving analog signals and discrete signals between hardware modules.

Sending and Receiving PrinciplesToken passing protocol is used in this system. A token (right to transmit) goes around nodes (devices connected to the network). Each device, in its turn, broadcasts transmission data to the network. Other devices listen to them and take in necessary data.There are four (4) communication terminal blocks as following:

• Di Receive Terminal: Discrete input, 32 points • Do Send Terminal: Discrete output, 32 points • Ai Receive Terminal: Analog input, 2 points • Ao Send Terminal: Analog output, 2 points

For transmitting data from the device A to the device B in the example shown above, first set necessary data in Send Terminal of the device A and broadcasts them to the network. Then set in Receive Terminal of the device B with the sender address specifying the device A, and take in the data from the network.Transmission data are broadcasted to the network together with their sender address. If another device requires to receive one of these data, set in its Receive terminal with the required sender address.

Address Setting ExampleThe following is an example of actual setting to transmit between the Controller A and B (or remote I/O C or D) mentioned in the above figure. In the figure below, boxes in solid line indicate data set in ITEMs of Communication Terminal blocks. Those in broken line indicates those set by other means such like Programming menu on the Controller or DIP switches of remote I/O device.

A

Controller

ReceiveSend

B

Controller

ReceiveSend

C

RemoteI/O Device

Send

D

RemoteI/O Device

Receive

E

RemoteI/O Device

ReceiveSend

NestBus

Sender C # ‘02’ (0 to F)

Sender G # ‘11’ (11 to 26)Transmission range Always ‘0’Destination address Always ‘0’

Send Terminal of Controller Receive Terminal of Controller or I/O

Sender C # ‘01’ (0 to F)

Sender G # ‘11’ (11 to 26)Transmission range Always ‘0’Destination address Always ‘0’

Sender S # Always ‘FF’Sender C # ‘01’Sender G # ‘11’

Receive Terminal of Contoller Send Terminal of Controller or I/O

Sender S # Always ‘FF’Sender C # ‘02’Sender G # ‘11’

Card No. set on Programming menuor with rotary switch

Communication Terminal’s Group No.

Card No. set on Programming menu

Communication Terminal’s Group No.

A B or C

A B or D

Page 164: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

164SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Appendix 1. FUNCTION BLOCK ERROR CODES

The following shows the meaning of error codes indicated in ITEM 02 of each function block.

CODE EXPLANATIONS ER : 00 Normal ER : 01 Connection terminal 1 undefined ER : 02 Connection terminal 2 undefined ER : 03 Connection terminal 3 undefined ER : 04 Connection terminal 4 undefined ER : 05 Connection terminal 5 undefined ER : 06 Connection terminal 6 undefined ER : 07 Connection terminal 7 undefined ER : 08 Connection terminal 8 undefined ER : 09 Connection terminal 9 undefined ER : 10 Computation error: Divided by ‘0’ ER : 11 Computation error: Result out of boundary* ER : 20 Communication terminal error: Not received ER : 21 Communication terminal error: Connected external device error ER : 22 Internal connected device error ER : 70 Invalid block combination ER : 80 Sequence error: Invalid command ER : 81 Sequence error: Undefined connection terminal ER : 87 Sequence error: Non-registered step ER : 88 Sequence error: Register overflow ER : 89 Sequence error: One-shot overflow ER : 90 EEPROM data base failed**

* 32767 < result < -32768 ** When the error is indicated, write ‘1’ at GROUP 00, ITEM 95 to execute BLOCK RELEASE in PROGRAM mode, or execute download after the EEPROM is cleared by the Loop Configuration Software.

Page 165: FUNCTION BLOCK LIST - M-System · SC100200 Serie unction loc it E6460 Rev6 5 1. INTRODUCTION Symbols used in function block tables : Parameter is remotely modifiable by using Parameter

165SC100/200 Series Function Block List EM-6460-B Rev.6

Appendix 2. SC SERIES VERSION UPGRADE INFORMATION

■ V 1.40 or later• Model 58 Segment Linearizer: 16 segments are available instead of 7.

• Model 64 Moving Average ITEM 12: Sampling 0.5 − 115.0 seconds (min. 0.5 sec. increments) ➔ 0.1 − 115.0 seconds (min. 0.1 sec. increments) ITEM 13: Number of samples 1 − 16 ➔ 1 − 32 ITEM 15: Calculation mode (new ITEM)

• Model F70, F71, F72, F73 SCxxx Extension Field Terminal 2 ITEM 52: Di/Pi selection (new ITEM). Pi 6 (high speed pulse input) can be replaced with Di 6 (discrete input).

ITEM added to F70, F71, F72, F73 SCxxx Extension Field Terminal 2 block ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS ★ 52 ▲ 0, 1 PD6: N Di/Pi selection (0: Di 6, 1: Pi 6)

■ V 1.50 or later• System Common Table (for SC100/200 series): Manual resetting of RUN contact is available.

ITEMs added to System Common Table (for SC100/200 series) ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 60 ▲ ■ RUN CONTACT ERROR RESET MODE 0, 1 RUN: 0 Automatic reset RUN: 1 Manual reset 61 ● ■ RUN CONTACT ERROR RESET FLAG 0, 1 0 Normal 1 Reset (valid when ITEM 60 is set to ‘manual reset’)

• Model 21 Basic PID, Model 22 Advanced PID: Effective range setting for the anti-reset windup function is available.

ITEMs added to PID blocks ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS★ 68 ▲ 0, 1 ARW: N Integral action range (0: MH – ML, 1: set range) ★ 69 ▲ ±115.00 % ARH: NNN.NN Integral action high limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’) ★ 70 ▲ ±115.00 % ARL: NNN.NN Integral action low limit (valid when ITEM 68 is set to ‘1’)

• Model 17 Rate of Change Limit block is available.• Model F72, F73 SC110/SC210 Extension Field Terminal 1: Backup status is available.

ITEM added to F72, F73 SC110/SC210 Extension Field Terminal 1 block ITEM MDFY DATA INPUT DISPLAY (e.g.) CONTENTS 87 ▲ 0, 1 15: N Backup status (0: normal, 1: backup)